JP6785208B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

When a game medium such as a game ball is launched into the game area by a launching device as a game machine, and the game medium wins a prize in a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area and an execution condition (starting condition) is satisfied. Pachinko that enhances the interest of the game by a so-called variable display game in which multiple types of identification information (hereinafter referred to as display symbols) are variably displayed on a variable display device and whether or not to give a predetermined game value is determined based on the display result. There is a game machine. In such a pachinko game machine, when the stop symbol mode when the variable display of the display symbol in the variable display game is completely stopped becomes the specific display mode, the player is in an advantageous state (big hit game state). For example, a pachinko gaming machine that is in a big hit game state opens a special electric accessory called a big winning opening or an attacker, makes it extremely easy to win a game ball, and gives a player a predetermined game value. Provide continuously for a certain period of time. In such a pachinko gaming machine, before the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display device, various kinds of effects that make the player expect the display result to be in a specific display mode are executed.

As such a game machine, a game machine that performs an auxiliary display according to the movement of a movable body is disclosed (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2014-104126

However, in the game machine described in Patent Document 1, the display pattern of the auxiliary display is monotonous, and there is a risk that the game interest may be deteriorated.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of preventing a deterioration in the interest of a game.

(1) This game machine is
A gaming machine equipped with a display means (for example, an image display device 5) and capable of being controlled in an advantageous state.
A production device capable of performing production (for example, a production accessory 90201) and
Movable bodies (eg pushbutton 90120) and
A specific effect executing means (for example, step S908120 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, the specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device. The part to be executed) and
A movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion for executing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) and
It is possible to execute the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the mode of the effect executed by the predetermined effect means, and to execute the effect auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect by the display means. A certain suggestion effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S804 or step S805) and
A notice effect execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of notice effects (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S814) and
With
The movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), it is shown in FIG. 63 (5). Perform a specific effect),
The suggestion effect execution means
It is possible to further execute a suggestion display effect different from the suggestion effect.
When the specific condition that the suggestion effect and the suggestion display effect are executed within the same period is satisfied, the effect auxiliary display is displayed in the specific display area of the display means, and at least the suggestion display is displayed. The effect is ended after the end of the suggestion effect, and the display by the specific display area is ended based on the end of the suggestion display effect.
When the specific condition is not satisfied, the effect auxiliary display can be displayed in a predetermined display area different from the specific display area (for example, when it is determined Yes in step S803, the process of step S805 is executed. Etc., for example, it is possible to display the motion effect image of the movable body in the specific display area in the image display device 5 and execute the movable body effect in a mode different from the normal time).
The advance notice effect executing means can execute the plurality of types of advance notice effects in the specific display area (the effect performed in step S814 is the same when a small screen as the specific display area is displayed. It is done on a small screen, etc.),
It is characterized by that.

According to such a configuration, the execution pattern of the production auxiliary display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed.

(2) In the game machine of (1) above
When the specific condition is satisfied, the suggestion effect executing means can execute the effect auxiliary display in the specific display area in the display means (for example, the operation of the movable body in the specific display area in the image display device 5). It is possible to display an effect image and perform a movable body effect in a mode different from the normal time),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that a specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(3) In the game machine of (1) or (2) above
Variable display means for variable display and
Corresponding display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) that performs corresponding display corresponding to variable display, and
When the display mode of the corresponding display can be changed and the display area of the corresponding display can be expanded (for example, in the process of step S807, the enlarged mode setting for the enlarged display is performed). , CPU 120 for effect control that performs enlargement control to magnify and display all the hold display and active display being displayed including the hold display to be announced).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode of the corresponding display changes, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

(4) In the gaming machine according to (2) or (3) above.
The predetermined effect means is a movable body (for example, a movable body 99) that can operate according to the effect executed by the display means.
When the suggestion effect executing means is capable of operating the movable body and executing an effect auxiliary display (for example, displaying an effect image) related to the operation of the movable body, and the specific condition is satisfied. Unlike the case where the specific condition is not satisfied, the effect auxiliary display is executed in the specific display area (for example, the movable body 99 is rotated as a movable body special effect and an effect is applied to a small screen which is a specific display area. Display images, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the production auxiliary display can be appropriately performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

(5) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4) above.
Variable display means for variable display and
Corresponding display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) that performs corresponding display corresponding to variable display, and
A display control means for controlling the display of the specific display area (for example, an effect control CPU 120 for executing the process of step S807 or step S810) is further provided.
The display control means can display a display other than the corresponding display in the specific display area (for example, display other than the display related to the hold / active change effect such as hold display, active display, character image in action effect, etc.). ),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity given by displaying the corresponding display in a plurality of display areas.

(6) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5) above.
Further provided with a notice effect execution means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S814) capable of executing a plurality of types of advance notice effects.
The advance notice effect executing means can execute the plurality of types of advance notice effects in the specific display area (the effect performed in step S814 is the same when a small screen as the specific display area is displayed. It is done on a small screen, etc.),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the visibility of the advance notice effect can be improved, the effect of the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

(7) In the gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above.
The suggestion effect execution means can further execute a suggestion display effect different from the suggestion effect (for example, a hold / active change effect can be executed).
The specific condition is satisfied when the suggestion effect and the suggestion display effect are executed within the same period (for example, the specific condition is specified by performing both the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and the movable body effect). Conditions are met, etc.),
The suggestion effect executing means ends at least the suggestion display effect after the end of the suggestion effect, and ends the display by the specific display area based on the end of the suggestion display effect (for example, hold / active change). The effect ends after the end of the movable body effect, and the small screen as a specific display area is deleted after the end of the hold / active change effect),
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the effect of production can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce the discomfort caused by the suggested Starring unloading is completed at the time of the half-hearted state (prevention).

(8) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (7) above.
Variable display means for variable display and
Corresponding display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) that performs corresponding display corresponding to variable display, and
Corresponding display changing means (for example, notice) that changes the display mode of the corresponding display and displays the corresponding display of the change target in a special display mode that is displayed only when the display mode of the corresponding display changes. It is further provided with an effect control CPU 120 or the like that changes the display mode of the hold display to be notified so that it is possible to recognize which hold the target variable display is.
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, the changing target becomes clear, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

(9) In the gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (8) above.
Variable display means for variable display and
Corresponding display means (for example, CPU 120 for effect control that performs hold display or active display) that performs corresponding display corresponding to variable display, and
The character 930 holds the color ball 931 as shown in the corresponding display changing means (as shown in FIGS. 26 (a), (b), and (c)) for changing the display mode of the corresponding display by acting the action display (for example, a ball). When thrown toward the display TH, the color ball 931 collides with the hold display TH and the color of the hold display TH changes, etc.).
The corresponding display changing means
The first pattern (such as the success pattern in FIGS. 26 (a), (b), and (c)) that starts the display of the action display and changes the display mode of the corresponding display after a lapse of a predetermined period, and the display of the action display. Is possible, and a second pattern (such as the failure pattern in FIGS. 26 (a), (b), and (d)) that does not change the display mode of the corresponding display after a lapse of a predetermined period can be executed.
After starting the display of the action display, it is possible to execute deceleration control for decelerating the speed of the action display with respect to the target corresponding display at a common timing in a predetermined period between the first pattern and the second pattern. (As shown in FIG. 26B, the deceleration of the ball speed is started at the same timing at the time of success and at the time of failure).
You may do so.

According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by changing the action display.

In addition, the embodiment for carrying out the invention described later includes the inventions relating to the following means A1 to means A6. Conventionally, in a game machine, after the display area of the effect display device is displayed and controlled in a non-display state (dark state) as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-259540, the effect display device is darkened. There is known a gaming machine that executes a special light emission effect (specific effect) in which a predetermined optical vortex image is displayed and controlled in a display area. However, in such a game machine, there is a possibility that the effect of the specific effect cannot be sufficiently enhanced when the specific effect is executed. In view of this point, it is required to provide a game machine capable of improving the effect of a specific effect.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to another aspect is a gaming machine capable of performing a game, and is a production device capable of performing a production (for example, a production accessory 90201) and an movable movable body (for example, a push). In the specific effect executing means (for example, the effect control microcomputer 90100), which can execute the specific effect (for example, the specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body by using the button 90120) and the effect device. The movable body control means includes a movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a part for executing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100), and the movable body control means executes a specific effect. It is characterized in that the movable body can be operated (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is executed). According to such a configuration, the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect after the movable body is operated by the movable body control means (for example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3). Later, the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) may be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to draw attention to the specific effect before the start of the specific effect.

(Means A3) In the means A1 or the means A2, the movable body is an operating means (for example, a push button 90120) that can be operated by the player, and the movable body controlling means controls the operating means when the specific effect is executed. The vibration operation is performed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is executed), and the operating means is a decorative member (for example, a decorative member in which the vibration operation is visible). , The vibrated member 90303) shown in FIGS. 28 and 29) may be included. According to such a configuration, the line of sight of the player can be guided to a specific effect by sight and touch.

(Means A4) In any one of the means A1 to the means A3, the light emitting body for the effect (for example, the frame LED9028) and the display means are darkened when the specific effect is executed (for example, FIG. 63 (2). ), The darkening display executing means (for example, the part that executes step S908108 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) for displaying the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 (blackout display), and for the effect. The movable body control means includes a light emission control means for controlling the light emission of the light emitting body (for example, a portion for executing steps S908109 and S8123 in the effect control microcomputer 90100), and the light emission control means turns off the light emitting body for the effect. In this state, the movable body can be operated (for example, as shown in FIG. 63 (3), the effect display device 909 is darkened (blacked out) and all the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off. , The push button 90120 may be vibrated). According to such a configuration, the player's line of sight can be more effectively guided to a specific effect.

(Means A5) In any one of means A1 to A4, the movable body control means has at least a first operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 1 second) and a second operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 3 seconds). It is possible to operate the movable body by a plurality of types of operation modes including (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the vibration time of the push button 90120 is provided as 1 second, 3 seconds, and 5 seconds). The specific effect execution mode differs depending on whether the movable body is operated according to the first operation mode or the movable body is operated according to the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 59). When the push button 90120 with a vibration time of 1 second is vibrated, the specific effect A is executed, and when the push button 90120 with a vibration time of 3 seconds is vibrated, the specific effect B is executed. It may be configured as such. According to such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the movable body.

(Means A6) In any of the means A1 to the means A5, a display means having a display area (for example, an effect display device 909) and a predetermined area (for example, an upper area) of the display area that is difficult for the player to see. A notice is given in step S908003 of the effect symbol variation start process in the effect control microcomputer 90100 in the predetermined display control means (for example, in the second other embodiment) capable of displaying a predetermined display (for example, a mini image) on the 905B or the like. A notice effect is executed by selecting a process table according to the effect and executing the process of step S908005 of the effect symbol change start process and the process during the effect symbol change (step S98002) according to the process table according to the advance effect. Part) and the line-of-sight guidance effect executing means (for example, the second other implementation) capable of executing the line-of-sight guidance effect (for example, a mini image moving in the area Z901) for guiding the player's line of sight to a predetermined area in the display area In the embodiment, the process table corresponding to the advance notice effect is selected in step S908003 of the effect symbol variation start process in the effect control microcomputer 90100, and the process of step S908005 of the effect symbol change start process according to the process table according to the advance notice effect. It may be configured to include a portion for executing the advance notice effect by executing the effect symbol changing process (step S90802). According to such a configuration, the interest of the game can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows various control boards and the like mounted on the pachinko game machine. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning prize determination processing. It is a figure for demonstrating the random number values MR1 to MR3. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the special figure hold storage part. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the start winning a prize determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the special symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the special figure display result determination table, and the jackpot type determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variation pattern setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of the fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the loss variation pattern determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of an effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the look-ahead effect execution setting process. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the look-ahead effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the final color determination table. It is a figure which shows the configuration example of the expansion mode setting presence / absence determination table. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the effect processing during variable display. It is a timing chart in the case where the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect which perform the enlarged display are performed. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the movable body production. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect. It is a figure which shows the production operation example of the hold change effect. It is a front view which looked at the pachinko machine from the front. It is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a push button. It is an exploded perspective view for demonstrating the internal structure of a push button. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure example of the game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit composition example of an effect control board, a lamp driver board, and an audio output board. It is a flowchart which shows the main process executed by the CPU in the main board. It is a flowchart which shows the 4ms timer interrupt processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is explanatory drawing which shows the big hit determination table, the small hit determination table, and the big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows the start port switch passing process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the hold storage buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol normal processing. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the display result specification command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the process during special symbol change. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the program of the special symbol display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU. It is explanatory drawing which shows the configuration example of the command reception buffer. It is a flowchart which shows the command analysis processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect control process process. It is a flowchart which shows the variation pattern command reception waiting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol variation start processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the stop symbol of the effect symbol. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is a flowchart which shows the specific effect setting process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the specific effect determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the processing during change of an effect symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the effect symbol fluctuation stop processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production mode of a suggestion effect and a specific effect. It is the figure which looked at the effect display device and the accessory (shown by a dotted line) from the front in the 2nd other embodiment. FIG. 6 is a sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 64 in the second other embodiment. It is a figure which shows the movement of the mini-images A-C in the 2nd other embodiment. It is an example of the production screen of the advance notice effect foretelling the degree of expectation of the execution of the super reach in the second other embodiment. This is an example of a production screen of a notice effect that announces the degree of expectation of a big hit in the second other embodiment.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment, and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly divided into a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting the game board surface and a game machine frame (underframe) 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. A game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined ball launching device into this game area.

A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). The first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are each composed of, for example, 7 segments or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes), and are identified in a special symbol game as an example of a variable display game. A special symbol (also referred to as a "special figure"), which is a plurality of types of possible identification information (special identification information), is variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". To do.

The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are limited to those composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9" and symbols indicating "-". However, for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns having different combinations of those to be turned on and those to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be preset as a plurality of types of special symbols. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as a "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as a "second special symbol". ..

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effects images. On the screen of the image display device 5, each of the variable display of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game is supported. For example, in a decorative symbol display area that is a plurality of variable display units such as three, decorative symbols that are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) that can identify each are variably displayed. The variable display of this decorative pattern is also included in the variable display game.

As an example, "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas are arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. Then, in the special symbol game, one of the fluctuation of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the variation of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is started. Fluctuation of the decorative symbol (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction) is started in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas. After that, when the confirmed special symbol is stopped and displayed as the variable display result in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol is variable in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas of the image display device 5. The final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the display result is stopped and displayed. The fixed decorative symbol may be different from the decorative symbol displayed during the variable display. For example, a decorative symbol other than the scroll-displayed decorative symbol may be a fixed decorative symbol.

On the screen of the image display device 5, it is synchronized with the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A or the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Then, a plurality of types of decorative symbols that can be identified by each are variably displayed, and a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed (or simply referred to as "deriving"). In addition, to derive and display various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means to display identification information such as a decorative symbol as a stop display (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and end the variable display. .. On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol becomes "0" and the decoration is displayed. The design may be stagnant and displayed, and may be in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction, for example. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not definitively displayed, the player can recognize that the change of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbol completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

A start winning memory display area 5H is arranged on the screen of the image display device 5. In the start winning prize storage display area 5H, a hold display is performed in which the variable display hold number (special figure hold memory number) corresponding to the special figure game is identifiablely displayed. Here, in the hold of the variable display corresponding to the special figure game, the game ball enters the first start winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball device 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B. It occurs based on the starting prize by passing (for example, passing). That is, the start condition (also referred to as "execution condition") for executing the variable display game such as the special figure game or the variable display of the decorative symbol is satisfied, but the variable display game based on the previously satisfied start condition is being executed. When the start condition that allows the start of the variable display game is not satisfied due to the fact that the pachinko game machine 1 is controlled to the jackpot game state, the variable display corresponding to the established start condition is held. Will be done. In this embodiment, the hold display is performed by displaying the same number of symbols as the hold variable display (in the present embodiment, a circle or the like, hereinafter also referred to as a hold display symbol). One hold display symbol corresponds to one hold variable display. The pending variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is represented by the reserved display symbol displayed in the area on the left side of the start winning prize memory display area 5H. The pending variable display corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is represented by the reserved display symbol displayed in the area on the right side of the start winning prize memory display area 5H.

For example, the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied by the occurrence of the first start prize in which the game ball enters the first start prize opening. If the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied, the number of stored first special figures is incremented by 1. ), And the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is established by the occurrence of the second start prize in which the game ball enters the second start prize opening. If the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the number of the second special figure hold storage is incremented by 1. ), And the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the number of stored special figures of the first special figure is decremented by 1, and the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1.

The variable display hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number is also particularly referred to as a total hold storage number. The term "special figure holding memory number" usually refers to a concept including all of the first special figure holding storage number, the second special figure holding storage number, and the total holding storage number, but in particular, a part of these (for example, for example). It may also refer to the concept of including the number of reserved memories of the first special figure and the number of reserved memories of the second special figure, but excluding the total number of reserved memories).

A display for displaying the number of reserved special figures may be provided together with the start winning prize memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning prize memory display area 5H. In the example shown in FIG. 1, along with the start winning prize storage display area 5H, the first hold for identifiable display of the number of special figure hold storages on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the number of hold storages of the first special figure in a identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the number of second special figure hold storage identifiable. The number of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B corresponds to, for example, the upper limit values (for example, "4") of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number, respectively (for example, 4). It is configured to include (1) LEDs. Here, the number of stored first special figures and the number of stored second special figures are displayed according to the number of LEDs lit.

On the screen of the image display device 5, an active display area 5HA is arranged in the vicinity of the start winning memory display area 5H. The active display area 5HA is displayed corresponding to the variable display during execution. The display in the active display area 5HA is referred to as an active display (also referred to as a variable display compatible display, a digestion display, or a current display). In the active display area 5HA, for example, in response to the start of the special figure game using the first special figure when the first start condition is satisfied, the first one erased (digested) in the start prize memory display area 5H. Active display is performed according to the hold display. Further, in the active display area 5HA, for example, it was erased (digested) by the second reserved storage unit 5HL in response to the start of the special figure game using the second special figure when the second start condition was satisfied. Active display is performed according to the second hold display.

A movable body 99 is provided at a predetermined position (here, the lower center side) in the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 99 rotates by the rotational drive of the movable body motor 61 shown in FIG.

A normal winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a normal variable winning ball device 6B is provided on the right side of the normal winning ball device 6A. The ordinary winning ball device 6A forms a first starting winning opening as a starting region (first starting region) that is always kept in a constant open state by, for example, a predetermined ball receiving member. The ordinary variable winning ball device 6B is an electric tulip-type accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed to a closed state in a vertical position and an open state in a tilted position by a solenoid 81 for an ordinary electric accessory shown in FIG. It is equipped with (ordinary electric accessory) and forms a second start winning opening.

As an example, in the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory is in the off state, so that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening. To. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball device 6B, when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the on state, the movable wing piece is in the tilting position, so that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening. Put it in a state. The normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, and the game ball can enter the second start winning opening, while the expanded open state when the solenoid 81 is in the on state. May be configured so that the game ball is difficult to enter. As described above, the ordinary variable winning ball device 6B has the first variable state such that the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening in the open state or the expanded open state, and the closed state or the game ball is difficult to enter. It is configured so that it can be changed to a second variable state such as a normally open state. The first variable state may be a state in which the game ball is easier to enter the second starting winning opening than the second variable state.

The game ball that has entered the first starting winning opening formed in the ordinary winning ball device 6A is detected by, for example, the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. The game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B is detected by, for example, the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls (prize game medium), and the first special figure reserved memory number is predetermined. If it is equal to or less than the upper limit value (for example, "4"), the first starting condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game balls by the second start port switch 22B, a predetermined number (for example, 3) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the number of the second special figure reserved memory is equal to or less than the predetermined upper limit value. For example, the second starting condition is satisfied.

The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers from each other. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may directly pay out the game balls to be prize balls, or may give points corresponding to the number of game balls to be prize balls.

A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A. The special variable winning ball device 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 2, and a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state depending on the large winning opening door. Form a big prize opening as.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is in the off state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball enters the large winning opening (for example, Can't pass). On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door is on, the large winning opening door opens the large winning opening, and the game ball can easily enter the large winning opening. Become. In this way, the large winning opening as a specific area changes into an open state in which the game ball is easy to enter and is advantageous for the player, and a closed state in which the game ball cannot enter and is disadvantageous to the player. In addition, instead of the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter the big winning opening, or in addition to the closed state, a partially open state in which the game ball is difficult to enter the big winning opening may be provided.

The game ball that has entered the grand prize opening is detected by, for example, the count switch 23 shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball enters the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the game ball enters another winning opening such as the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening. More prize balls will be paid out. Therefore, if the large winning opening is opened in the special variable winning ball device 7, the game ball can enter the large winning opening, which is an advantageous first state for the player. On the other hand, if the large winning opening is closed in the special variable winning ball device 7, it becomes impossible or difficult for the game ball to enter the large winning opening to obtain the winning ball, which is disadvantageous to the player. There are two states.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, the left side of the game area). As an example, the ordinary symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, a plurality of types different from the special symbol. The ordinary symbol (also referred to as "ordinary diagram" or "ordinary diagram"), which is the identification information, is variably displayed (variable display). Such a variable display of a normal pattern is called a normal figure game (also referred to as a "normal figure game"). Above the normal symbol display 20, a normal symbol hold display 25C is provided. The normal figure hold indicator 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the normal figure hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

In addition to the above configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a large number of obstacle nails. Further, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening and the large winning opening, for example, a single or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be done. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as prize balls based on the fact that the game balls that have entered any of the general prize openings are detected by the predetermined general prize ball switch. At the bottom of the game area, there is an out opening for taking in a game ball that has not entered any of the winning openings.

Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the game machine frame 3, and game effect lamps 9 are provided around the game area. Decorative LEDs may be arranged around each structure (for example, a normal winning ball device 6A, a normal variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1. At the lower right position of the game machine frame 3, a ball striking operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch the game ball as a game medium toward the game area is provided. For example, the hitting ball operation handle adjusts the elastic force of the game ball according to the amount of operation (rotation amount) by the player or the like.

At a predetermined position of the game machine frame 3 below the game area, the game balls paid out as prize balls and the game balls rented by the predetermined ball lending machine are held (stored) so as to be able to be supplied to the hitting ball launching device. ) An upper plate (ball hitting plate) is provided. At the lower part of the gaming machine frame 3, a lower plate is provided to hold (store) surplus balls and the like overflowing from the upper plate so that they can be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

A stick controller 31A that can be gripped and tilted by the player is attached to a member forming the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, the central portion of the lower plate). There is. The stick controller 31A includes an operation stick held by the player, and a trigger button is provided at a predetermined position of the operation stick (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator hangs when the player holds the operation stick). There is. The trigger button can be operated by pushing and pulling with a predetermined operating finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 31A with an operating hand (for example, left hand). It suffices if it is configured as follows. A trigger sensor that detects a predetermined instruction operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button may be built in the operation stick.

A controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2) including a tilting direction sensor unit that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 31A. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit is two transmissive photosensors (parallel sensors) arranged parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the side of the player facing the pachinko game machine 1. A pair of) and two transmissive photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicular to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operation rod when viewed from the player's side. It may be configured to include a photo sensor.

The member forming the upper plate includes a push button 31B (for example, a push button 31B (for example, above the stick controller 31A) on the upper surface of the upper plate main body, which allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. (See FIG. 2) is provided. The push button 31B may be configured so that a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player can be detected mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35B for detecting the player's operation action performed on the push button 31B may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 31B.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, a voice control board 13, and a lamp control board 14, as shown in FIG. 2, for example. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, an interface board, a touch sensor board, and the like are arranged on the back surface of the game board of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and is equipped with various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board including a random number setting function used in a special figure game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like arranged at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. , It has a function to output and transmit a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, and a function to output various information to the hall management computer. Further, the main board 11 controls lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to control the lighting / extinguishing of the first special symbol and the second special symbol. Variable display of a predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variable display of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinguishing / coloring of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

For example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like are mounted on the main board 11. The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (detection signals indicating that the passage or approach of the game medium has been detected) from various switches for detecting the game ball and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The solenoid circuit 111 normally uses a solenoid drive signal from the game control microcomputer 100 (for example, a signal for driving each solenoid, such as a signal for turning the solenoid 81 and the solenoid 82 into an on or off state) for an electric accessory. It is transmitted to the solenoid 81 of the above and the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door.

The effect control board 12 is a control board on the sub side independent of the main board 11, receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives an image display device 5, speakers 8L, and 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the production electrical components such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 includes all or part of the display operation of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, and all or one of the lighting / extinguishing operations of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. It has a function of determining the control content for causing the electric component for effect such as a unit to execute a predetermined effect operation, and controlling the determined control content.

The audio control board 13 is a control board for audio output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs audio from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a processing circuit that executes audio signal processing for this purpose. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for controlling lamp output provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is a game effect lamp 9, a decorative LED, or the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. It is equipped with a lamp driver circuit that drives the lighting / extinguishing of the lamp.

As shown in FIG. 2, detection signals from various switches such as a gate switch 21, a start port switch (first start port switch 22A and a second start port switch 22B), and a count switch 23 are transmitted to the main board 11. The wiring is connected. The various switches may have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a switch called a sensor. Further, a wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control of the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like is connected to the main board 11.

The control signal transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used to control sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. A lamp control command used to control the lighting operation of the decorative LED or the like may be included.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100. The command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol (corresponding to each variation pattern XX). ). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variable patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a variable command corresponding to each of the variable patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the command 80XX (H) is received, the effect control CPU 120 controls the image display device 5 to start variable display of the effect symbol.

The command 8A01 (H) is an effect control command (first start winning opening designation command) for notifying when the game ball enters the first starting winning opening. The command 8A02 (H) is an effect control command (second start winning opening designation command) for notifying when the game ball enters the second starting winning opening.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are effect control commands indicating the content of the winning determination result, and as the winning determination result, it is an effect control command indicating whether or not to make a big hit and the big hit type. .. Since the effect control CPU 120 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C03 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands. Command 8C01 (H) (display result 1 designation command) specifies a loss. Command 8C02 (H) (display result 2 designation command) specifies 15R jackpot and probability variation. Command 8C03 (H) (display result 3 designation command) specifies 15R jackpot and non-probability variation.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation start designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation start designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol change start designation command and the second symbol change start designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or a symbol change start designation command).

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the effect symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, it ends the variable display (variable display) of the effect symbol and derives and displays the display result.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is started (at the time of initial setting). The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is restarted (at the time of initial setting at the time of restart). When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if the data is stored in the backup RAM, and if not, the initialization designation. Send a command. The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The command A001 (H) is an effect control command (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) that specifies the start of fanfare (start of the jackpot game state) in the case of a 15-round jackpot.

In the big hit game state, the fanfare is executed first, and then the main big hit game in the big hit game state in which the special variable winning ball device 7 which is the big winning opening is opened (round game, etc.) is executed, and the big hit is executed. The ending is executed after the game. The fanfare is an effect of notifying or suggesting that the jackpot game state has started, that is, the jackpot game is about to start. The ending is an effect of notifying that the jackpot game state has ended, that is, the jackpot game has ended.

The command A2XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the large winning opening) for designating the opening of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. A3XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) for designating the closure of the special variable winning ball device 7 for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A601 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending designation command) for designating the start of the ending.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state specification command) that specifies that the game state is the normal state (normal game state). The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state designation command) that specifies that the gaming state is the time saving (advantageous) state. The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (time reduction number designation command) for designating the remaining number of times of the time reduction (advantageous) state (how many more times the time reduction state continues until the variation display is finished). "XX" in the command B1XX (H) indicates the number of remaining times in the time saving (advantageous) state.

The command C0XX (H) is an effect control command (total hold storage number designation command) for designating the total hold storage number obtained by adding the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number. "XX" in the command C0XX (H) indicates the total number of pending storages. The command C1XX (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number designation command) for designating the first special figure hold storage number. "XX" in the command C1XX (H) indicates the number of reserved first special figures. The command C2XX (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number designation command) for designating the second special figure hold storage number. "XX" in the command C2XX (H) indicates the second special figure reserved storage number.

The command C6XXH is an effect control command indicating the content of the winning determination result, and as the winning determination result, the determination result (variation pattern type) of which determination value range the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type falls within. This is a variation category command that indicates the determination result) (corresponding to the variation pattern XX, respectively). That is, as with the variation pattern command, when a unique number is assigned to each of the variation patterns that can be used, which will be described later, there is a command corresponding to each variation pattern specified by the number.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and is a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 that stores a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. The RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides the area, the CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes the game control program to perform the control operation, and the numerical data indicating the random value are updated independently of the CPU 103. It is configured to include a random number circuit 104 to perform the operation and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1 is executed by executing the program read from the ROM 101 by the CPU 103. At this time, a fixed data read operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data to the RAM 102 and temporarily stores them, and various variable data temporarily stored in the RAM 102 by the CPU 103. The variable data read operation, the CPU 103 receives input of various signals from the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation that outputs various signals is also performed.

The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may have at least a RAM 102 built in in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101, the random number circuit 104, the I / O 105, and the like may be externally attached.

In the game control microcomputer 100, numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the progress of the game is updatablely counted by, for example, a random number circuit 104. Random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers. The game random number may be updated by hardware such as a random number circuit 104, or may be updated by software when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 executes a predetermined computer program. You may. For example, a predetermined random value is shown in a random counter provided in a predetermined area (game control counter setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 102 in the game control microcomputer 100, or a random counter provided in an internal register separate from the RAM 102. The random value may be updated by storing the numerical data and updating the stored value periodically or irregularly by the CPU 103.

In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various selection data, table data, and the like used for controlling the progress of the game. For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, etc. prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 includes table data constituting a plurality of command transmission tables used by the CPU 103 to transmit control signals to be various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern table for storing a plurality of types of variation patterns. The table data to be configured is stored. In the RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100, various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are temporarily stored in a rewritable manner.

The effect control board 12 includes an effect control CPU 120 that performs control operations according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, a RAM 122 that provides a work area for the effect control CPU 120, and an image display device. The display control unit 123 that executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in 5, the random number circuit 124 that updates the numerical data indicating the random number value independently of the effect control CPU 120, and the I / O 125. And are installed.

As an example, in the effect control board 12, a process of controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed by executing the effect control program read from the ROM 121 by the effect control CPU 120. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes various variation data to the RAM 122, and the effect control CPU 120 temporarily stores the variation data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data read operation to read various temporarily stored fluctuation data, reception operation in which the effect control CPU 120 receives input of various signals from the outside of the effect control board 12, and the effect control CPU 120 to the outside of the effect control board 12. Transmission operations that output various signals are also performed.

The effect control CPU 120, ROM 121, and RAM 122 may be included in the one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. The effect control board 12 has wiring for transmitting image data to the image display device 5 and wiring for transmitting an effect sound signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the voice control board 13. Wiring for transmitting an illumination signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Further, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the stick controller 31A has been detected from the controller sensor unit 35A and a game for the push button 31B A wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that a person's operation action has been detected from the push sensor 35B is also connected. Further, the effect control board 12 is also connected with wiring for transmitting a predetermined drive command signal to the motor drive circuit 16 for driving the movable body motor 61 that rotates the movable body 99.

In the effect control board 12, for example, a random number circuit 124 or the like counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values used for controlling the effect operation. The random number used to control such an effect operation is also called an effect random number.

The ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 2 stores various data tables and the like used for controlling the effect operation in addition to the program for effect control. For example, the ROM 121 contains a plurality of determination tables prepared for the effect control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings, table data constituting the determination tables, pattern data constituting various effect control patterns, and the like. It is remembered. The effect control pattern is, for example, from process data including effect control execution data (display control data, voice control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, etc.) and an end code associated with the effect control process timer determination value. It is configured. Various data used for controlling the effect operation are stored in the RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12.

The effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 generates various commands. For example, the effect control CPU 120 determines the content to be displayed by the image display device 5, and outputs a display control command to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, and generates image data. For example, the display control unit 123 controls the variable display of the decorative pattern and various effect displays by determining the switching timing of the effect image to be displayed in the display screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the display control unit 123 may include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like. The VDP may be a GPU (Graphics Processing Unit), a GCL (Graphics Controller LSI), or a microprocessor for image processing generally referred to as a DSP (Digital Signal Processor). The CGROM may be, for example, a non-rewritable semiconductor memory, a rewritable semiconductor memory such as a flash memory, or a non-volatile recording medium such as a magnetic memory or an optical memory. It may be configured.

The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 has an input port for taking in the effect control command transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12. And are included. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (effect sound signal) transmitted to the audio control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Illumination signal), a command (drive control signal) transmitted to the motor drive circuit 16 and the like are output.

With the above configuration, the effect control CPU 120 causes the effect image to be displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123. Further, the effect control CPU 120 controls the speakers 8L and 8R via the voice control board 13 to output sound, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED via the lamp control board 14. The effect image is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 via the display control unit 123, or the movable body motor 61 is driven via the motor drive circuit 16 to move the movable body 99. In this way, various effects (such as a reach effect, a movable effect member effect, a message effect in which the image display device 5 displays an image of a message to the player, and the like, which will be described later) are executed. ..

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined game is performed using a game ball as a game medium, and a predetermined game value can be given based on the game result. As an example of a game using a game ball, a predetermined hit ball is launched based on a predetermined operation (for example, a rotation operation) of a ball hitting operation handle installed at the lower right of the front surface of the housing in the pachinko gaming machine 1. A game ball as a game medium is launched toward the game area by a launch motor or the like provided in the device. When the game ball flowing down the game area enters the first start winning opening (first starting area) formed in the normal winning ball device 6A, the game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 22A shown in FIG. As a result, the first starting condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A starts. Will be done.

Further, when the game ball enters the second start winning opening (second starting area) formed in the normally variable winning ball device 6B, the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B shown in FIG. The second starting condition is satisfied. After that, based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, due to the end of the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state, the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B starts. Will be done. However, when the normally variable winning ball device 6B is in the normally open state or closed state as the second variable state, it is difficult or impossible for the game ball to enter the second starting winning opening.

Based on the fact that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. 2, the normal symbol start condition for executing the variable display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 20 is established. After that, the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started based on the establishment of the normal symbol start condition for starting the variable display of the normal symbol, for example, that the previous normal symbol game has ended. In this normal symbol game, when a predetermined time elapses after starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol, the confirmed normal symbol, which is the variable display result of the normal symbol, is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (design per normal symbol) is stopped and displayed as the confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "per normal symbol". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the normal symbol per symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed normal symbol, the variable display result of the normal symbol becomes "normal symbol loss". In response to the fact that the variable display result of the normal symbol is "per normal figure", the opening control and the expansion opening control are performed so that the movable wing piece of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball device 6B becomes the tilting position. , Closing control or normal opening control that returns to the vertical position after a predetermined time is performed. Whether or not the variable display result of the normal symbol is set to "per normal figure" as a predetermined specific display result depends on the variable display result such as when the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. Is determined (predetermined) before it is derived and displayed.

When the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is started, or when the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B is started, it is special. Whether or not the variable display result of the symbol is to be a "big hit" as a predetermined specific display result is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Then, the variation pattern is determined at a predetermined ratio based on the determination of the variable display result, and the effect control command for designating the variable display result and the variation pattern is the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 shown in FIG. Is transmitted from to the effect control board 12.

After the special figure game is started based on the determination of the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern, for example, when a predetermined variable display time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern elapses, a definite special symbol that becomes the variable display result is derived. Is displayed. "Left", "middle", and "right" decorations arranged on the screen of the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. In the symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, a variable display of a decorative symbol (directed symbol) different from the special symbol is performed. In a special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, a definite special that produces a variable display result of the special symbol. When the symbol is derived and displayed, the image display device 5 derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is a variable display result of the decorative symbol.

When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the special symbol, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes a "big hit" (specific display result), and an advantageous value is given to the player. It is controlled to the jackpot game state as a specific game state. That is, whether or not the variable display game state is controlled corresponds to whether or not the variable display result becomes a "big hit", and is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. As a variable display result of the special symbol, when the jackpot symbol is not derived and displayed and the lost symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display result (special symbol display result) becomes "missing".

As an example, a special symbol indicating the numbers "3", "5", and "7" is used as a jackpot symbol, and a special symbol indicating the symbol "-" is used as a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as the jackpot symbol or the lost symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A may be a special symbol different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. However, the special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol.

In the big hit game state, the big winning opening is opened and the special variable winning ball device 7 is in the first state which is advantageous for the player. Then, the large winning opening is continued for a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds or 0.1 seconds) or for a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls enter the large winning opening and a winning ball is generated. A round game (also simply referred to as a "round") that is opened is executed. During the period other than the execution period of such a round game, the large winning opening is closed, and the winning ball is difficult or impossible to generate. When a game ball enters the large winning opening, the winning ball is detected by the count switch 23, and a predetermined number (for example, 14) of the game ball is paid out as a winning ball for each detection. The round game in the jackpot game state is repeatedly executed until a predetermined upper limit number of times (for example, "15") is reached.

When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when a jackpot symbol indicating the numbers "3" and "5" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability" and the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed. When it is done, the jackpot type becomes "probability change". When the jackpot type is "non-probable" or "probable", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round is performed with a relatively long upper limit (for example, 29 seconds). The jackpot game state in which the normal open round is executed is also referred to as a normal open jackpot state or a first specific game state.

When the special figure display result is "big hit", the case where the big hit type is either "non-probable change" or "probable change" is included. For example, as a variable display result of a special symbol, when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "3" is derived and displayed, the jackpot type is "non-probability", and when the jackpot symbol indicating the number "7" is derived and displayed, the jackpot is displayed. The type is "probability change". When the jackpot type is "non-probable" or "probable", the special variable winning ball device 7 is set as the first state (the jackpot is open) which is advantageous for the player as a round game in the jackpot game state. A normal open round is performed with a relatively long upper limit (for example, 29 seconds).

After the jackpot game state ends, the probability that the variable display result becomes a "big hit" (big hit probability) is controlled to a probability variation state that is higher than the normal state based on the establishment of the predetermined probability variation control condition. There is. The probability change state is controlled so as to continue until a predetermined probability change end condition such as the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied. Further, after the jackpot game state is completed, the average variable display time may be controlled to a shorter time state than the normal state. The time saving state includes a first advantageous state and a second advantageous state, and for example, the average variable display time is different. The time saving state is controlled so as to continue until one of the time saving end condition of either the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times or the start of the next big hit game state is satisfied first. .. It should be noted that the probability change state is controlled so as to continue until one of the predetermined number of variable displays is executed and the next big hit game state is started, and one of the probability change end conditions is satisfied first. It may be done.

As an example, when the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", the gaming state becomes the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state ends. On the other hand, when the jackpot type is "probability change", after the jackpot game state ends, the game state becomes the time saving state and the probability change state.

In the time saving state, the normal variable winning ball device 6B is placed in the first variable state (open state or expanded open state) and the second variable state (in the open state or expanded open state) in an advantageous changing mode in which the game ball is more likely to enter the second starting winning opening than in the normal state. Change to closed state or normally open state). For example, the normal symbol display 20 controls the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (normal symbol fluctuation time) in the normal symbol game to be shorter than that in the normal state, and the variable display result of the normal symbol in each normal symbol game is "normal". Control to improve the probability of "hit the figure" compared to the normal state, tilt control time to control the tilt of the movable wing piece in the normal variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result being "hit the normal figure" The normal variable winning ball device 6B is changed into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous change mode by controlling to make the normal variable winning ball device 6B longer than in the normal state and by controlling to increase the number of tilts as compared with the normal state. Just do it. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed, or a plurality of controls may be combined and performed. In this way, the control for changing the normally variable winning ball device 6B into the first variable state and the second variable state in an advantageous changing mode is called high opening control (also referred to as "time saving control" or "high base control"). Will be done. By being controlled to such a time saving state, the time required until the next variable display result becomes a "big hit" is shortened, and the special gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the normal state.

The time saving state in which the high opening control is performed is also called "high base state" or "high base", and the gaming state that is not in the time saving state is also called "low base state" or "low base". The probabilistic state in which the probabilistic control is performed is also called "high probabilistic state" or "high probability", and the gaming state that is not the probabilistic state is also called "low probability state" or "low probability". The gaming state in the probabilistic state and the time saving state is also called "high accuracy high base state", "high accuracy high base" and the like. The gaming state when the time is shortened instead of the probability change state is also called "low probability high base state", "low probability high base state", or the like. The gaming state when the time is not shortened but is in the probabilistic state is also called "high probability low base state", "high probability low base state", or the like. A normal state that does not fall into either a time saving state or a probability variation state is also called a "low probability low base state" or a "low probability low base state".

The game balls used as a game medium in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the recorded information of the scores given according to the number of the balls may have valuable value that can be exchanged for special prizes or general prizes according to the quantity, for example. Just do it. Alternatively, the recorded information of these game balls and scores may have valuable value that can be used for another game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, although it cannot be exchanged for a special prize or a general prize.

Further, the game value that can be given by the pachinko game machine 1 is not limited to paying out the game ball as a prize ball and giving points, for example, controlling to a big hit game state or a special game state such as a probability change state. Control, the maximum number of round games that can be executed in the jackpot game state is the number of the first round (for example, "15"), which is larger than the number of the second round (for example, "7"), and the game is executed in the time saving state. The upper limit of possible variable display is the first number (for example, "100"), which is larger than the second number (for example, "50"), and the jackpot probability in the probability variation state is higher than the second probability (for example, 1/50). The number of consecutive chans, which is the number of times that the first probability is high (for example, 1/20) and the number of times that the jackpot game state is repeatedly controlled without being controlled in the normal state, is larger than the number of consecutive chans (for example, "5"). It may include a more favorable gaming situation for the player, such as part or all of the large number of first consecutive chans (eg, "10"). The advantage for the player is, for example, a state in which the player is actually advantageous when a certain event occurs (a state in which the privilege is given or is given, a state in which the ratio of the privilege is given is high). , The rate of being in an advantageous state different from the privilege, etc., or the rate of being in an advantageous state, etc. In addition, the privilege that is shown to be highly likely to be granted by the special aspect may be the same as the target of the advantage for the player (advantageous state), and is different from the target of the advantage for the player. It may be one.

In the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A , Of the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started corresponding to the start of any special symbol game. Then, the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the end of the variable display due to the stop display of the final decorative symbol in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In (the period during the variable display), the variable display mode of the decorative symbol may be a predetermined reach mode.

Here, the reach mode is a decorative symbol that has not yet been stopped and displayed when the decorative symbol that has been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 constitutes a part of the jackpot combination (“reach variable symbol”). (Also referred to as) is a display mode in which the fluctuation is continuous, or a display mode in which all or a part of the decorative symbols are changed in synchronization while forming all or a part of the jackpot combination. Specifically, some of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.) are preliminarily used. When the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric characters of "7") that constitutes the specified jackpot combination is stopped and displayed, the remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, "medium" decoration) that has not yet been stopped is displayed. In the symbol display area 5C, etc.), the decorative symbol is fluctuating, or the decorative symbol is a big hit in all or part of the decorative symbol display area 5L, 5C, 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". It is a display mode that varies synchronously while forming all or a part of the combination.

In addition, in response to the reach mode, the fluctuation speed of the decorative symbol is reduced, or a character image (effect image imitating a person or the like) different from the decorative symbol is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. By changing the display mode of the background image, reproducing and displaying a moving image different from the decorative pattern, or changing the variable mode of the decorative pattern, a different production operation from before the reach mode is executed. May be done. Such an effect operation such as a change in the display mode of the character image, a display mode of the background image, a reproduction display of the moving image, and a change in the variation mode of the decorative pattern is called a reach effect display (or simply a reach effect). In addition, in the reach effect, not only the display operation on the image display device 5, but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (blinking operation) on the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like before the reach mode is reached. It may be included that the operation mode is different from the operation mode of the above.

As the effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as "reach patterns") having different operation modes (effect modes) may be prepared in advance. Then, the possibility of becoming a "big hit" (also referred to as "reliability" or "big hit reliability", "expectation" or "big hit expectation") differs depending on the production mode in each reach production. That is, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" can be different depending on which of the plurality of types of reach effects is executed. In this embodiment, as an example, reach effects such as normal, super A, super B, and super C are preset. The reach effects of Supers A to C in this embodiment are reach effects in which a plurality of characters fight. In the following, the reach effects of Super A to C are referred to as Super Reach A to C, and the normal reach effects may be referred to as Normal Reach.

As described above, the super reach A to C in this embodiment is a reach effect in which a plurality of characters fight. In Super Reach A to C, for example, the fighting characters may be different, and each of Super Reach A to C may have a different production mode. In Super A or B, when the predetermined character wins the battle, the variable display result becomes "big hit", and when the predetermined character loses the battle, the variable display result becomes "miss". When Super Reach C is executed, Super Reach A may be executed after the execution of Super Reach C (it may develop into Super Reach A). When Super Reach C is executed but Super Reach A does not develop (for example, when a predetermined character loses the battle), the variable display result is "missing". On the other hand, when it develops into Super Reach A (for example, when a predetermined character wins the battle), the variable display result may be a "big hit".

Depending on which reach effect is executed, the variable display result of the variable display may be "big hit" (in the present embodiment, the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change" "big hit"). Big hit expectation) changes. For example, the jackpot expectation is higher when Super Reach A to C is executed than when Normal Reach is executed. Also, among the super reach, when super reach A (including the case where it evolved from super reach C) is executed, when super reach B is executed or when super reach C is executed (super reach). The jackpot expectation is higher than when it does not develop into A). On the contrary, when the super reach C is executed, the jackpot expectation may be higher than when the super reach B is executed or the super reach A is executed. In this case, the super reach C may be executed after the execution of the super reach A (it may develop into the super reach C).

The jackpot expectation is, for example, (probability that the effect is executed at the time of a jackpot) x (probability of being a jackpot) / {(probability that the effect is executed at the time of a jackpot) x (probability of being a jackpot) + (other than at the time of a jackpot) (Probability that the effect is executed) x (Probability of not becoming a big hit)} (When the big hit expectation is "1", the variable display result is always "Big hit". Same for degrees.)

During the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be in the reach state, and the variable display result may be a "big hit". Depending on the variable display mode of the decorative pattern, a variable display effect for notifying the player may be executed. Although the description is omitted in this embodiment for ease of understanding, variable display effects such as "slip" and "pseudo-ream" can be executed. It suffices to decide whether or not to execute the variable display effect of "sliding" and "pseudo-ream" in response to the determination of the variation pattern on the main board 11 side. It should be noted that whether or not the variable display effect of "slip" is executed on the effect control board 12 side may be determined regardless of the fluctuation pattern determined on the main board 11 side.

In the variable display effect of "slip", the decorative symbols in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all changed, and then a plurality of decorative symbol display areas (for example,). After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R, etc.), a predetermined number (for example, "1" or "2") of the temporarily stopped displayed decorative symbol display areas is displayed. ”) Decorative symbol display area (for example, either one or both of the“ left ”decorative symbol display area 5L and the“ right ”decorative symbol display area 5R), and then stop display after changing the decorative symbol again. , An effect display is performed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. In this way, in the variable display effect of "slip", a predetermined number of decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed after the variable display of the decorative symbols is started until the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. By executing the variable display of the decorative symbol again, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the decorative symbol constituting the non-reach combination is stopped and displayed without being in the reach state. is there.

In the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream", the variable display is performed after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to the fact that either the first start condition or the second start condition of the special figure game is satisfied once. After the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" before the resulting finalized decorative symbol is derived and displayed. It is possible to perform an effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed (re-variated) again in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R a predetermined time (for example, up to 3 times). The number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations in this embodiment is "left", "middle", and "right", excluding the initial fluctuation from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the first temporary stop of all decorative symbols. It shall refer to the number of times that the decorative symbol revariates in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", for example, one of a plurality of predetermined pseudo-ream chances. Once the decorative symbols constituting the above are temporarily stopped and displayed as a predetermined display result, the variable display (re-variation) is performed again thereafter. The pseudo-ream chance may include a combination of decorative symbols that is a predetermined non-reach combination instead of the variable display mode of the decorative symbol being the reach mode. In addition, the pseudo-ream chance may include a combination of decorative symbols that becomes a predetermined reach loss combination (simply also referred to as “reach combination”) after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode. For example, among the pseudo-ream chance eyes, the decorative symbol (middle symbol) that is stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C is a special decorative symbol (pseudo-ream chance symbol) that is not used in the variable display of the decorative symbol in normal times. ) May be used. Among the decorative symbols used in the variable display of the decorative symbol in the normal state, a pseudo-continuous chance symbol that becomes a pseudo-continuous chance eye by being stopped and displayed in the "middle" decorative symbol display area 5C may be included. ..

In the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", the variable display of the decorative symbol is performed multiple times based on the fact that the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the re-variation (pseudo-ream fluctuation). You can make it look as if it was started in succession.

In addition to "sliding" and "pseudo-ream", for example, "development chance eyes", "development chance eyes end", and "slip after chance eyes stop" are examples of variable display effects that utilize the variable display operation of such decorative patterns. Various production operations such as, may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of the "development chance eye", "left", "middle", and "right" are used from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols that make up the development chance eyes included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the variable display state of the decorative symbols is reached. As a predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development chance eye is temporarily stopped and displayed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes the "big hit" after the reach state. Expectations are raised.

In addition, in the variable display effect of "end of development chance", after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started, in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" , An effect display is performed in which a predetermined combination of decorative symbols is derived and displayed as a final decorative symbol as a development chance eye. In the variable display effect of "slip after stopping the chance", as in the variable display effect of "pseudo-ream", from the start of the variable display of the decorative symbol to the derivation display of the final decorative symbol that is the variable display result. , "Left", "Middle", "Right" Decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, 5R After temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative pattern of the lost combination (special combination) that is a pseudo-continuous chance eye in all Unlike the variable display effect of "pseudo-ren", which changes the decorative pattern again in all of the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative pattern changes again in a part of the decorative pattern display area 5L, 5C, and 5R. By doing so, an effect display for changing the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed is performed.

In addition, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, unlike the reach effect or the variable display effect such as "pseudo-ream", for example, a predetermined effect image is displayed, an image display as a message, a voice output, etc. , There is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol will be in the reach state due to the effect operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative symbol, the reach effect by super reach may be executed, and the variable display result. There is a case where a notice effect is executed to notify the player in advance that there is a possibility that the player will be a "big hit".

The effect operation that becomes the advance notice effect is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol after the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Is executed (started) before the reach mode is reached (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R of the "left" and "right"). Further, the advance notice effect for notifying that the variable display result may be a "big hit" may include one executed after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach mode. In this way, the notice effect can be in the big hit game state at a predetermined timing from the start of the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol or the confirmed decorative symbol that is the variable display result. Anything that can foretell sex will do. A plurality of advance notice patterns are prepared in advance according to the content (effect mode) of the effect operation when the advance notice effect is executed.

The advance notice effect includes a look-ahead advance notice effect (also referred to as a look-ahead effect). In the look-ahead notice effect, the variable display result is "big hit" according to the effect mode before the variable display is executed, which is the target (notice target) for which the possibility that the variable display result will be "big hit" is announced. It is a notice production that can announce the possibility of becoming. In particular, the pre-reading advance notice effect that continuously gives notice over the variable display of the decorative pattern that is executed a plurality of times in response to a plurality of special figure games is also referred to as a continuous advance notice effect. In the look-ahead notice effect, before the variable display to be notified is started, the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit" is announced based on, for example, the hold memory of the special figure game due to the occurrence of the start prize. The production operation for the game is started.

For example, as a look-ahead notice effect, by changing the display of the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, there is a possibility that the variable display to be notified will be a “big hit”. A look-ahead notice effect of "hold display change" for notifying such things is executed. More specifically, the display color in the display portion for identifiablely displaying the number of reserved special figures is any one of a specific color (for example, red, green, blue, and white) different from the predetermined color (for example, gray) in the normal state. It is sufficient to be able to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" by using a shape (for example, a star shape) different from the shape (for example, a round shape) in the normal state. In addition, by setting the display pattern of the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H to a specific pattern (for example, Sakura pattern) different from the normal one, the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. May be able to be notified. Alternatively, by setting the display mode to show a predetermined message (for example, "secret") as the hold display, it is possible to notify (suggest) that the display color is more likely to change to a specific color than usual. Good. A hold display that suggests that such a display mode is likely to change to a specific mode is also referred to as a suggestion hold display. The pre-reading notice effect of "hold display change" is also called a hold change effect. In comparison with the look-ahead notice effect, the notice effect whose execution is started after the variable display to be notified is started is a single notice effect (also referred to as a single notice, the variable notice, or a variable display during notice effect). Is called. In this embodiment, as a pre-reading effect of the "hold display change", an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display to be announced is performed so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be notified is on hold. May be Specifically, an effect effect that displays an effect image showing a character (character for change effect) prepared in advance on the screen of the image display device 5 and exerts an effect on the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be notified. By performing this, it becomes possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be notified is on hold. In addition, in order to facilitate understanding, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the action effect (the timing at which the variable display to be notified becomes recognizable) is set to the hold display to be notified. Although the timing of the first shift is set, the execution timing of the action effect may be determined at a different ratio depending on the variable display result, which shift timing is set among the plurality of shifts. As will be described in detail later, in the look-ahead effect of the "hold display change" in this embodiment, the action effect may or may not be performed, and when the action effect is not performed, it is for the change effect. The character is not displayed, and the mode is changed so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be notified is on hold.

The look-ahead notice effect executed based on the occurrence of the start prize is executed (started) after the start prize occurs, before the player can determine whether or not the notice content by the look-ahead notice effect is realized. Anything is fine. For example, the look-ahead notice effect that announces that a certain start prize may occur may result in a reach state, rather than at least the variable display state of the decorative symbol based on the occurrence of the start prize becomes the reach state (or non-reach state). Anything that is executed (started) before may be used. In addition, the look-ahead notice effect that announces that the variable display result may become a "big hit" due to the occurrence of a certain start prize is at least more than the fixed decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the variable display based on the occurrence of the start prize. Anything that is executed (started) before may be used.

In this embodiment, as an example of the single notice effect, the display of the effect image in the active display area 5HA is changed to a display mode different from the display mode in the normal time, so that the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is "big hit". The notice effect of "active display change" for notifying the possibility of becoming "" is executed. More specifically, the display color in the active display area 5HA is a specific color (for example, red, green, blue, or white) different from a predetermined color (for example, gray) in the normal time, or a shape in the normal time. By using different shapes, it is sufficient to notify that the variable display result is more likely to be a "big hit" than usual. In addition, by making the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA a specific icon different from the round solid color at the normal time, a message such as "?", "Chance", or "super heat" is notified. It suffices to suggest the possibility that the variable display result will be a "big hit". In addition, the icon displayed in the active display area 5HA includes an icon that notifies a message such as "NEXT" to notify that the pseudo-ream variation in the variable display effect of the "pseudo-ream" is executed. May be good. The advance notice effect of "active display change" is also called active change effect.

Specifically, in the active change effect according to this embodiment, an effect image (effect image displayed at the time of hold display effect) showing a character (character for change effect) prepared in advance is displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. The display color is displayed by performing an action effect on the display (active display) of the active display area 5HA at the timing when the hold display of the notice target (hold display of the target of the hold change effect) shifts (shifts) to the active display area 5HA. There are cases where the display color of the active display is changed without the action effect being performed. As described above, in this embodiment, as the hold change effect, an effect of changing the display mode so that it is possible to recognize which hold the variable display to be notified is on hold is performed. Then, an active change effect is performed as an independent notice effect, the hold display whose display mode has changed shifts to the active display area 5HA, and the display color changes. That is, first, the notice target is indicated in the hold change effect, and the display color changes in the active change effect (suggesting the jackpot expectation), and this series of effects (hold change effect and active change effect) is performed. In this embodiment, it is called a hold / active change effect. In this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the pending change effect only makes the notice target recognizable to the player, and the jackpot expectation is suggested by the active change effect (that is, in the active change effect). Although the display color changes for the first time), the display color may be changed to suggest the jackpot expectation even in the hold change effect. Specifically, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect, and the display color may not be changed in the active change effect, or the display color may be changed in the hold change effect and further displayed in the active change effect. The color may be changed. For example, in the hold change effect, the display color is changed stepwise each time the hold display is shifted (including the case where it does not change even if it is shifted), and when the hold display area is shifted to 5HA, the active change effect is performed and further displayed. You may change the color (you may also produce a ghost). Further, in the hold / active change effect in this embodiment, all the hold display and the active display in the display including the hold display to be announced may be enlarged and displayed. Specifically, as will be described later, in the hold / active change effect, when the hold / active change effect whose display color changes to green or red is started, it is being displayed for a period until the hold / active change effect ends. All the hold display and active display of are sometimes enlarged (the display color is changed to white or blue, and the hold / active change effect is not enlarged). Further, when the hold / active change effect to be enlarged and displayed is started, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5, and the image displayed in the hold / active change effect (for example, hold display). , Active display, character image in action production, etc.) are all displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. The small screen display ends when the hold / active change effect ends (display control in the specific display area ends). The various images displayed on the small screen may have the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5 (for example, the screen size of the image display device 5 is 10 and the screen size of the small screen). If is 1, the image displayed on the small screen may have a ratio of 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5). Further, in this embodiment, when the enlarged display is not performed, the action effect is not performed in the hold / active change effect. However, for example, the action effect is performed by displaying a small character image. The action effect may be performed in a mode different from the case of performing the enlarged display.

Further, in this embodiment, as a look-ahead notice effect, a movable body is used every time the variable display is performed during the period until the variable display corresponding to the hold of the notice target is performed (including the variable display of the hold of the notice target). A movable body effect that rotates 99 is executed. Specifically, the movable body effect is executed in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold to be announced is performed, and is performed for a predetermined period (for example, 2 seconds) from the start of each variable display. At that time, the image display device 5 displays an effect image and displays that the movable body 99 is effectively conspicuous.

That is, in this embodiment, two types of look-ahead effects such as a hold / active change effect and a movable body effect are executed, but these may be performed individually or in duplicate. It should be noted that the movable body effect when the hold / active change effect in which the enlarged display is performed and the movable body effect are performed in duplicate is called a movable body special effect. In the movable body special effect, the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5. This makes it possible for the player to easily recognize that the movable body 99 is rotating, and prevents the hold display and the active display from becoming unrecognizable.

When the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, becomes a "big hit", a fixed decorative symbol which is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. As an example, the same decorative symbols are aligned and stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right", so that the jackpot combination is confirmed. It suffices if the decorative pattern is derived and displayed.

When the jackpot type is "non-probability variation", a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probability variation jackpot combination may be derived. The definite decorative symbol that is a non-probability change jackpot combination is, for example, the symbol number that is variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 is "1". ~ Of the decorative symbols of "8", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are even "2", "4", "6", and "8" is "left", "middle", and "right". In the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the above, the stop display is aligned on a predetermined effective line, and any type of fixed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination may be used. The decorative symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the non-probability jackpot combination are even numbers "2", "4", "6", and "8" are referred to as non-probability variation symbols.

When the jackpot type is "probability variation", a definite decorative symbol that is a non-probability variation jackpot combination may be derived, or a definite ornamental symbol that is a probability variation jackpot combination may be derived. The fixed decorative symbols that are the probabilistic jackpot combination are, for example, the symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5 are "1" to Among the decorative symbols of "8", any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" is "left", "middle", and "right". The decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are aligned on a predetermined effective line and stopped and displayed, and may be a type of fixed decorative symbol that is a big hit combination. The decorative symbols whose symbol numbers constituting the probability variation jackpot combination are odd numbers "1", "3", "5", and "7" are referred to as probability variation symbols.

A re-lottery effect may be executed during the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the fixed decorative symbol is a non-probable variable jackpot combination or a probabilistic jackpot combination. In the re-lottery effect, after temporarily stopping and displaying the decorative symbols that are the non-probable change jackpot combination in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the "left", "middle", and "right" in the image display device 5, for example, " In each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative symbols are changed again with the same decorative symbols aligned, and the decorative symbols (probability variation symbols) that are a probabilistic jackpot combination and non-probability variation symbols. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variation symbols) that is a probabilistic jackpot combination is displayed as a definite decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "non-probability change", as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the non-probability change jackpot combination after re-variating the decorative symbol displayed temporarily stopped. A re-lottery defeat effect is performed in which the symbols are derived and displayed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the jackpot type is "probability change", as the re-lottery effect, the definite decoration that becomes the probability change jackpot combination after the decorative symbol temporarily stopped and displayed is re-variated. The re-lottery winning effect of stopping and displaying the symbol may be executed, or the re-lottery losing effect may be executed.

When the jackpot type is "probability change", the decorative symbol that is a non-probability change jackpot combination is displayed once during the variable display of the decorative symbol, and the re-lottery effect is executed during the variable display, or the jackpot game state after that. At the end of the medium or big hit game state, the big hit middle promotion effect may be executed, and the start of the control in the probable change state may be notified. The jackpot promotion effect is performed in the jackpot game state at the start of the jackpot game state, during the execution of a round in the jackpot game state, and during the period from the end of one round in the jackpot game state to the start of the next round. During the period from the end of the final round to the start of the next variable display game, the probability change notification of whether or not to control the probability change state is performed. It should be noted that the same notification effect as the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot game state. In the big hit game state, the big hit middle promotion effect that is executed after the final round is finished is sometimes called "ending promotion effect" in particular. The start of the control in the probabilistic state may be notified without executing the re-lottery effect or the promotion effect during the big hit.

When the special symbol display result is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol does not become the reach mode, and the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined non-reach combination are stopped and displayed, so that the non-specific display result is obtained. The definite decorative design may be derived and displayed. Further, when the special symbol display result is "missing", after the variable display mode of the decorative symbol becomes the reach mode, the decorative symbols constituting the predetermined reach combination (also referred to as "reach loss combination") are stopped and displayed. By doing so, a definite decorative symbol that is a non-specific display result may be derived and displayed.

Next, the main operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described.

When the power supply from the predetermined power supply board is started on the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process which is the game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 sets the interrupt disabled and then performs the necessary initial settings. In this initial setting, for example, RAM 102 is cleared. In addition, the register of the CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set. As a result, after that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute the timer interrupt process. When the initial setting is completed, interrupts are permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko game machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed, and then the loop process may be started.

When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives the interrupt request, it sets the interrupt disabled state and executes a predetermined game control timer interrupt process. The game control timer interrupt processing includes, for example, switch processing, main side error processing, information output processing, game random number update processing, special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, command control processing, and other games in the pachinko gaming machine 1. It includes processing to control the progress of.

The switch process is a process of determining the state of detection signals input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110. The error processing on the main side is a processing in which an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result. The information output process is a process of outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. The game random number update process is a process for updating at least a part of a plurality of types of game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software.

As an example, the game random numbers used on the side of the main board 11 include a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern. It may be included (see FIG. 6). The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random number value used for determining whether or not to control the variable display result such as a special symbol in the special figure game as a “big hit” to the big hit game state, and is “1”. It can take any value of ~ "65535". The random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is used to determine the jackpot type to be one of a plurality of types, such as either "non-probability variation" or "probability variation", when the variable display result is "big hit". It is a random number value and can take any value of "1" to "100". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol to any one of a plurality of prepared patterns, and is "1" to "251". Can take any value of.

In the special symbol process process included in the game control timer interrupt process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is displayed on the special symbol display device 4. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the operation and set the opening / closing operation of the large winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 according to a predetermined procedure. The normal symbol process process controls the display operation (for example, turning on and off of the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20, and sets the variable display of the normal symbol and the tilting operation of the movable wing piece on the normal variable winning ball device 6B. It is a process that enables.

The command control process is a process of transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to a control board on the sub side such as the effect control board 12. As an example, in special symbol process processing, ordinary symbol process processing, etc., the transmission setting of control commands (effect control command, etc.) is set in advance for each command in the command transmission table (in advance in ROM 101 according to the effect control command to be transmitted). ) Is performed by designating the storage address (starting address) in the ROM 101 (for example, storing the value of the storage address in the transmission command buffer provided in the RAM 102), and is provided in the RAM 102 in the command control process. Of the output ports included in the I / O 105, for the effect control board 12, corresponding to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer (for example, the value indicating the storage address in the ROM 101). After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command, set the predetermined control data in the output port of the effect control INT signal and turn the effect control INT signal on for a predetermined time and then turn it off. By doing so, it is possible to transmit the effect control command (effect control command set to be transmitted) based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, the interrupt enable state is set, and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing an example of special symbol process processing. In this special symbol process process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

When the start winning prize determination process is started, the CPU 103 first starts with the first starting port based on the detection signal from the first starting port switch 22A provided corresponding to the first starting winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A. It is determined whether or not the switch 22A is on (step S201). At this time, if the first start port switch 22A is on (step S201; Yes), the number of reserved special figures reserved for the special figure game using the first special figure is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S202). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the first special figure by reading the first hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the first hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the first special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; No), the start port which is the stored value of the start port buffer provided in the predetermined area (game control buffer setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. The buffer value is set to "1" (step S203).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step S201 (step S201; No), or when the first special figure reserved storage number reaches the upper limit value in step S202 (step S202; Yes), it is normal. Based on the detection signal from the second starting port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is determined whether or not the second starting opening switch 22B is on ( Step S204). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step S204; Yes), the second special figure hold storage number, which is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure, is a predetermined upper limit value. (For example, "4") is determined (step S205). At this time, the CPU 103 holds the second special figure by reading the second hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the second hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.). It suffices if the number of memories can be specified. When the second special figure reserved storage number is not the upper limit value in step S205 (step S205; No), the start port buffer value is set to "2" (step S206). If the second start port switch 22B is not turned on (step S204; No), or if the second special figure hold storage number is the upper limit value (step S205; Yes), the start winning determination process is terminated.

After executing any of the processes of steps S203 and S206, the hold storage count value corresponding to the start port buffer value is updated to be added by 1 (step S207). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first hold storage count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second hold storage count value is added by 1. In this way, the first reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the first start winning opening and the first start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied. ) Is updated. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is incremented by 1 when the game ball enters the second start winning opening and the second start condition corresponding to the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied. ) Is updated. At this time, the total hold storage count value, which is the stored value of the total hold storage counter provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting unit, etc.), is updated so as to be added by 1 (step S208).

After executing the process of step S208, the CPU 103 extracts a predetermined game random number corresponding to the occurrence of the start winning prize (step S209). As an example, in the process of step S209, the random number for determining the special figure display result is determined from the numerical data updated by the random number counter or the like provided in the predetermined area (game control counter setting unit or the like) of the random number circuit 104 or the RAM 102. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR1, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern are extracted (see FIG. 6). Numerical data indicating each random value extracted in this way is stored as hold data by being set at the beginning of a free entry in the special figure hold storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S210). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the hold data is set in the first special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7A. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the hold data is set in the second special figure hold storage unit as shown in FIG. 7 (B).

The first special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7A has not been started yet, although the game ball has entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A and the first starting winning has been generated. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the first starting winning opening (the order of detecting the game ball) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the first starting condition by the entry of the game ball. The number of stored data is the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103, the random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern as reserved data. Is stored until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the first special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game (variable display). It is possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, a reach effect of super reach). It becomes the hold storage information.

The second special figure reservation storage unit shown in FIG. 7B has been started even though the game ball has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B and the second starting winning has been generated. The reserved data of the special figure game (the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order with the second starting winning opening (the detection order of the game balls) with the holding number, and based on the establishment of the second starting condition by the entry of the game ball. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. Store until a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4") is reached. The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit in this way indicates that the execution (variable display) of the special figure game using the second special figure is held, and the variable display result in this special figure game (variable display). It is possible to determine whether or not it is determined to control the jackpot game state based on the special figure display result), and whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a specific mode (for example, a reach effect of super reach). It becomes the hold storage information.

Following the process in step S210, the CPU 103 performs a start winning determination process (step S211). The start winning determination process is a process for so-called look-ahead. In this embodiment, when the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started, the special symbol display result (variable display result of the special symbol) is performed by the special symbol normal processing (step S110, FIG. 9 in FIG. 4) described later. Is set as "big hit" and it is decided whether or not to control the big hit gaming state. Further, in the variation pattern setting process (steps S111 and 11 in FIG. 4), which will be described later, the variation pattern that specifically defines the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is determined.

On the other hand, apart from these determinations, the CPU 103 executes the winning determination process in step S211 at the timing when the game ball is detected at the starting winning opening (first starting winning opening or second starting winning opening). , Judgment as to whether or not the special figure display result of the special figure game executed by this start winning is a "big hit", and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol executed by this start winning is a display mode with reach. Judgment as to whether or not As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that has entered the starting winning opening is started, the special symbol display result becomes a "big hit" and the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. Is predicted to be a display mode with reach, and based on this prediction result, the color of the hold change effect or the active display is changed by the effect control CPU 120 or the like on the effect control board 12 side. It is possible to decide whether or not to execute an active change effect that changes the color.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the start winning determination process. First, the CPU 103 confirms the state of the time saving flag (flag that turns on when the time saving state) and the probability change flag (flag that turns on when the time saving state) provided in the predetermined area in the RAM 102. The current gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is specified (step S401). The CPU 103 identifies that it is in the probabilistic state when the probabilistic flag is on, identifies that it is in the time saving state when the time saving flag is on, and is in the normal state when both the probabilistic flag and the time saving flag are off. You just have to specify that.

Following the process of step S401, the CPU 103 selects a table prepared corresponding to the current gaming state from among a plurality of special figure display result determination tables prepared in advance by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. It is selected and set in the used table (step S402). A plurality of special figure display result determination tables are prepared depending on whether the game state is a probabilistic state or the like. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines the special figure display result as a "big hit". It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of which one is "missing".

For example, as the special figure display result determination table, a special figure display result determination table (see FIG. 10A) corresponding to the non-probable change state and the probable change state is prepared. The CPU 103 sets the table in use by reading the table corresponding to the current gaming state from the ROM 101 to the RAM 102 among the tables.

After that, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result extracted in step S209 of FIG. 5 is within the predetermined jackpot determination range (step S403). In the jackpot determination range, individual decision values assigned to the special figure display result of "big hit" are set in the usage table set in the process of step S402, and the CPU 103 compares the random number value MR1 with each decision value one by one. By doing so, it is sufficient if it is possible to determine whether or not there is a determined value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, a numerical value indicating the minimum value (lower limit value) and the maximum value (upper limit value) of the determined value included in the jackpot determination range is set, and the CPU 103 sets the random number value MR1 and the minimum value or maximum value of the jackpot determination range. By comparing, it suffices if it can be determined whether or not the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range. At this time, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the range of the jackpot determination range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined as "big hit" (big hit start determination). ..

If it is determined in step S403 that it is not within the jackpot determination range (step S403; No), the CPU 103 uses a display result specification command (determination at the time of starting winning) according to the case where the variable display result is "missing". A command for designating "loss" as a display result among the results) is set to be transmitted to the effect control board 12 (step S405).

If it is determined in step S403 that the jackpot is within the jackpot determination range (step S403; Yes), the CPU 103 determines the jackpot type based on the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type (step S409). At this time, the CPU 103 refers to a jackpot type determination table prepared in advance by storing it in a predetermined area of the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10B, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type as "non-probability change" and "probability change". It suffices if it is assigned to the decision result of which one to use. The CPU 103 uses the jackpot type assigned to the determined value that matches the random number value MR2 as the determination result this time. A display result designation command (a command for designating a "big hit" of "probability change" or "non-probability change" as a display result among the judgment results at the time of starting winning) according to the judgment result by the processing of step S409 is provided on the effect control board. A transmission setting for transmitting to 12 is performed (step S410).

After executing any of the processes of steps S405 and S410, the CPU 103 transmits a variable category command (a command for designating the variable category among the determination results at the time of starting winning) to the effect control board 12. (Step S413).

After step S413, the CPU 103 sets the transmission of the start winning opening designation command (step S414). The first start winning opening designation command here is the effect control board 12 as the effect control information for notifying the increase in the number of reserved first special figures when the first start condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the first start prize. Is sent to the side of. Further, the second start winning opening designation command is the effect control board 12 as the effect control information for notifying the increase of the second special figure reserved storage number when the second start condition is satisfied due to the occurrence of the second start prize. It is sent to the side. After step S414, the winning determination process ends.

It will be described again by returning to FIG. After that, the CPU 103 determines whether the start port buffer value is "1" or "2" (step S212). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step S212; "2"), the start port buffer is cleared, the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S213), and then the start prize is won. The judgment process ends. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "1" (step S212; "1"), the start port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to "0" (step S214). The process proceeds to step S204. As a result, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect a valid start prize for the game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start prizes can be reliably completed.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 uses steps S110 to S117 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the predetermined area (game control flag setting unit or the like) of the RAM 102. Select and execute one of the processes of.

The special symbol normal processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A or the like is based on the presence or absence of reserved data stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, such as the first special symbol reservation storage unit and the second special symbol reservation storage unit. The second special symbol display device 4B determines whether or not to start the special symbol game. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the variable display result determines whether or not the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set as a "big hit" based on the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. Derived Determined (predetermined) before being displayed. At this time, when the variable display result is determined to be "big hit", the big hit type is determined to be either "non-probable change" or "probable change". The jackpot type is stored by storing the data indicating the determination result of the jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer provided in the predetermined area (for example, the game control buffer setting unit) of the RAM 102. Further, in the special symbol normal processing, the fixed special symbol (big hit symbol,) in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B corresponds to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Any of the lost symbols) is set. In the special symbol normal processing, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1" when the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is determined in advance.

FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S110 of FIG. 4 as the special symbol normal process. In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure hold storage number is “0” (step S231). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B. The CPU 103 may read the second hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0".

When the number of second special figure reserved storage is other than "0" in step S231 (step S231; No), for example, the head area of the second special figure reserved storage unit (for example, the storage area corresponding to the hold number "1"). As the reserved data stored in the predetermined area of the RAM 102, the numerical data indicating the predetermined random value is read out (step S232). As a result, the game random numbers extracted in response to the occurrence of the start prize (second start prize) at the second start prize opening in the process of step S209 shown in FIG. 5 are read out. The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for fluctuation and temporarily stored.

Following the process of step S232, for example, by subtracting 1 from the second reserved memory count value and updating, the second special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the second special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S233). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the second special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S233, the total number of reserved storages (total number of reserved storages count value) is updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the variation special figure designation buffer value, which is the storage value of the variation special figure designation buffer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control buffer setting unit), is updated to "2" (step S234).

When the second special figure reserved storage number is "0" in step S231 (step S231; Yes), it is determined whether or not the first special figure reserved storage number is "0" (step S235). The first special figure hold storage number is the hold storage number of the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A. The CPU 103 may read the first hold storage number count value and determine whether or not the read value is "0". As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the second special figure reserved storage number is "0", and the first special figure reserved storage number is "0". Judge whether or not. As a result, the special figure game using the second special figure is started to be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure.

In addition, regardless of whether it is the first start winning opening or the second starting winning opening, if the special figure game is executed in the order in which the game balls enter the starting winning opening, the first starting winning opening And the start opening data indicating which of the second start winning openings the game ball has entered is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 in association with the hold number together with the hold data or separately from the hold data. For the special figure game corresponding to each reserved data, the order in which the start conditions are satisfied may be specified.

Following the process of step S236, for example, by subtracting 1 from the first reserved memory count value and updating, the first special figure reserved memory is updated so as to be subtracted by 1, and the first special figure reserved memory is updated. The stored contents in the unit are shifted (step S237). For example, the reserved data stored in the storage area lower than the reserved number "1" (the storage area corresponding to the reserved numbers "2" to "4") in the first special figure reserved storage unit is placed one entry higher. shift. Further, in the process of step S237, the total number of reserved storages (total number of reserved storages count value) is updated to be subtracted by 1. Then, the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is updated to "1" (step S238).

After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol, is determined to be either "big hit" or "loss" (step S239). As an example, in the process of step S239, a special figure display result determination table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set as a table used for determining the special figure display result. In the special figure display result determination table, for example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result determines the special figure display result as "big hit". It suffices that the result of determining which of the “missing” is to be assigned is assigned according to the presence or absence of the probability change control in the probability change state (whether or not the game state is the probability change state). The CPU 103 reads numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result included in the game random number temporarily stored in the variable random number buffer in step S232 or S236 from the variable random number buffer, and the game state is in the probability changing state. By referring to the special figure display result determination table set in the usage table based on whether or not there is, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1, the game state is disturbed depending on whether or not it is a probabilistic state. The determination result of either "big hit" or "loss" assigned to the determination value corresponding to the numerical value MR1 may be determined as the special figure display result. The CPU 103 determines that the probability change control is performed when the probability change flag (the flag that turns on in the probability change state) provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is in the on state. do it. For example, when the random number value MR1 is "9000", the CPU 103 determines that the special figure display result is "big hit" when the probability change flag is on (when there is probability change control), and the probability change flag is set. When it is in the off state (when there is no probability change control), it is determined that the special figure display result is "missing".

As shown in FIG. 10 (A), when the probability change control is performed in the probability change state, the special figure display result is "" at a higher rate than when the probability change control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state. "Big hit" is decided. Therefore, for example, based on the jackpot end processing of step S117 shown in FIG. 4 (details will be described later), the probability variation flag is set to the on state corresponding to the case where the jackpot type is "probability variation". When the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the special figure display result is more likely to be a "big hit" and the jackpot game state is more likely to occur than when the probabilistic control is not performed in the normal state or the time saving state.

After that, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the special figure display result determined by the process of step S239 is a "big hit" (step S240). When the special figure display result is determined to be "big hit" (step S240; Yes), the big hit flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is set to the on state (step S24 ). ..

Further, the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S242). As an example, in the process of step S242, the jackpot type determination table shown in the table prepared by storing in a predetermined area of the ROM 101 in advance is selected and set in the table used for determining the jackpot type. In the jackpot type determination table, the determination result of whether to use multiple types of jackpot types (“probability variation” or “non-probability variation”) according to the numerical value (decision value) compared with the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. It suffices if it is assigned to (see FIG. 10B). The CPU 103 reads numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type included in the game random number temporarily stored in the random number buffer for variation in steps S232 or S236 from the random number buffer for variation, and the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type. By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in the usage table based on the numerical data indicating the above, one of the jackpot types assigned to the determination value corresponding to the random number MR2 may be selected. For example, when the random number value MR2 is "75", the CPU 103 determines (selects) "probability variation" as the jackpot type.

After executing the process of step S242, the jackpot type is stored (step S243). The CPU 103 puts a jackpot type buffer provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, a game control buffer setting unit) into a jackpot type buffer setting value (for example, as shown in FIG. 10B) showing a determination result of the jackpot type. The jackpot type may be stored by storing "0" in the case of "probability variation" and "1" in the case of "probability variation").

When the special symbol display result is not "big hit" in step S240 (step S240; No), or after the processing of steps S241 to S243 is executed, the final special symbol which becomes the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game is confirmed. Is determined (step S246). As an example, when it is determined in steps S240 and S244 that the special symbol display result is not a "big hit", a special symbol predetermined as a lost symbol is determined as a final special symbol. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S240 that the special figure display result is "big hit", a plurality of types of big hits are made according to the determination result of the big hit type in step S242 (according to the big hit type buffer set value). Any of the special symbols predetermined as the symbols may be determined as the final special symbol.

After executing the process of step S246, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "1" (step S247), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "1" in step S247, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

If the number of reserved memory of the special figure game using the first special figure is "0" in step S235 (step S235; Yes), after performing the predetermined demo display setting (step S248), the special symbol Ends normal processing. In this demo display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demo specification command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is produced from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the transmission has been completed to the substrate 12. At this time, if it has already been sent, the demo display setting is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been sent, the setting for sending the customer waiting demo specification command is made, and then the demo display setting is terminated. When the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the effect control board 12 displays the demo screen.

The fluctuation pattern setting process in step S111 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process of determining the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on a preliminary determination result of whether or not the variable display result is a "big hit". Since the variable pattern specifies the content of the variable display of the decorative symbol (variable display mode), the content of the variable display of the decorative symbol is determined by this determination. The variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is preset according to the variable pattern. Therefore, by determining the variation pattern in the variation pattern setting process, the variable display time from the start of the variable display of the special symbol to the derivation of the finalized special symbol that is the variable display result is determined. Further, the variable pattern setting process may include a process of determining whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is set to "reach" when the variable display result is "missing". Alternatively, even if it is determined whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is set to "reach" by determining the variation pattern when the variable display result is "missing" in the variation pattern setting process at a predetermined ratio. Good. Further, the variation pattern setting process may include a process of setting the special symbol display device 4 to start the variation of the special symbol. When the variation pattern setting process is executed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2".

FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of FIG. 4 as the variation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is on (step S261). Then, when the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the big hit when the special figure display result is "big hit" is determined (step S262).

When the jackpot flag is off in step S261, the CPU 103 determines the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the loss when the special figure display result is “loss” (step S265).

FIG. 12 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "missing", the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is "non-reach" which is not the reach mode, and the reach mode is ". Multiple cases corresponding to each case of "reach", and also corresponding to the case where the variable display result (special figure display result) is "big hit" and the big hit type is "non-probable change" or "probable change". Fluctuation patterns are prepared in advance.

In this embodiment, as the fluctuation pattern for which the variable display result is "missing" and "non-reach" is specified, the fluctuation patterns for normal time (non-time reduction) are changed from PA1-1 to PA1-3, and the fluctuation for time reduction is used. Patterns PB1-1 and PB1-2 are prepared.

In addition, a variation pattern is prepared in which the contents correspond to the case where the variable display result is "big hit" (the big hit type is "probable change" or "non-probable change" "big hit") and the case where the variable display result is "missing". Specifically, a fluctuation pattern PA2-1 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-1 (“big hit”) that specify that normal reach is executed are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2-2 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-2 (“big hit”) that specify that Super Reach A is executed are prepared. In addition, a fluctuation pattern PA2-3 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-3 (“big hit”) that specify that Super Reach B is executed are prepared. Further, a fluctuation pattern PA2-4 (for loss) and a fluctuation pattern PA3-4 (“big hit”) that specify that the super reach C is executed and then developed into the super reach A are prepared.

In the process of step S262 shown in FIG. 11, for example, the fluctuation pattern at the time of a jackpot is determined using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. As an example, in the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern is common regardless of whether the jackpot type is "non-probability change" or "probability variation". It suffices if it is assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern.

The CPU 103 refers to the jackpot variation pattern determination table based on the numerical data indicating the variation pattern determination random number value MR3 read from the variation random number buffer, and thereby assigns the variation assigned to the determination value corresponding to the random number value MR3. The pattern may be determined (selected) as the variation pattern used this time. For example, when the random number value MR3 is “140”, the CPU 103 selects the variation pattern PA3-3.

In the process of step S265 shown in FIG. 11, a loss variation pattern prepared in advance corresponds to a case where the game state is the normal state and a case where the game state is the time reduction state and the time reduction control is performed. The fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined using the determination table. For example, whether or not the time is being shortened is specified by whether or not the time saving flag (flag that is turned on when the time is shortened) provided in a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (for example, the game control flag setting unit) is in the on state. If the time reduction is not in progress (when the time reduction flag is off), the variation pattern at the time of loss is determined using the loss variation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (A). On the other hand, during the time reduction (when the time reduction flag is on), the fluctuation pattern at the time of loss is determined using the loss fluctuation pattern determination table shown in FIG. 14 (B).

In each loss fluctuation pattern determination table, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern may be assigned to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern according to the total number of reserved storages. The total number of reserved storages may be specified from, for example, the total number of reserved storages, which is the stored value of the total number of reserved storages, the total value of the first number of reserved storages, the second number of reserved storages, and the like. ..

The CPU 103 sets the normal time and the time saving based on whether or not the time is shortened, the total held storage count value, and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern read from the fluctuation random number buffer. By referring to any of the loss fluctuation pattern determination tables according to the above, when the total number of reserved memory is not in the time saving, "0" to "1", "2" to "4", "5" to "8" Fluctuation pattern assigned to the determined value corresponding to the random number value MR3 according to which of the above corresponds to, and which of "0", "1", "2" to "8" corresponds to when the time is shortened. Should be determined (selected) as the fluctuation pattern used this time.

For example, when the time saving flag is on and the random number value MR3 is "229", the CPU 103 selects the fluctuation pattern PA2-1 when the total number of pending storage count values is "0" and holds the total. When the storage number count value is "1", the fluctuation pattern PB1-1 is selected, and when the total reserved storage number count value is any of "3" to "8", the fluctuation pattern PB1-2 is selected.

After executing any of the processes of steps S262 and S265 shown in FIG. 11, the CPU 103 sets the special figure variation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol (step S266). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the definite special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is derived and displayed. Is. As shown in FIG. 12, the special figure fluctuation time is predetermined in accordance with a plurality of fluctuation patterns prepared in advance. The CPU 103 can set the timing at which the variable display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is derived by setting the special symbol variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected in the processes of steps S262 and S265.

Following the process of step S266, the CPU 103 determines the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B. Among them, the setting for starting the fluctuation of the special symbol is made so as to start any of the special symbol games for which the start condition is satisfied (step S267). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1", a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is "2", the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the first special figure, the CPU 103 controls the first hold display 25A to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted 1st special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25A may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one). When the CPU 103 starts the variable display using the second special figure, the CPU 103 controls the second hold display 25B to display a display capable of specifying the subtracted second special figure hold storage number. The hold indicator 25B may be made to perform (for example, reduce the number of LEDs lit by one).

After executing the process of step S267, the command transmission setting at the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol is performed (step S268). For example, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 receives the first symbol fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the first from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Set the transmission settings for sequentially transmitting the hold storage number specification command. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 receives the second symbol fluctuation start designation command, the fluctuation pattern command, the display result designation command, and the second symbol from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Set the transmission settings for sequentially transmitting the hold storage number specification command. The set command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. Here, the first symbol change start designation command and the second symbol change start designation command are transmitted as hold notification information that specifies which of the first special figure hold storage number and the second special figure hold storage number has decreased. Will be done.

After executing the process of step S268, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "2" (step S269), and then the variation pattern setting process ends. By updating the value of the special figure process flag to "2" in step S269, when the next timer interrupt occurs, the special symbol variation process of step S112 shown in FIG. 4 is executed.

The special symbol variation process in step S112 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. The special symbol change processing includes a process of changing the special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, and a process of measuring the elapsed time from the start of the change of the special symbol. It is included. Then, when the elapsed time from the start of the fluctuation of the special symbol reaches the special symbol fluctuation time, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the fluctuation of the special symbol, and the special symbol is displayed. The confirmed special symbol (confirmed special symbol set in step S110), which is the variable display result of the symbol, is stopped and displayed (deriving display), and the special symbol is stopped and displayed (deriving display) when the stop display is displayed. The transmission setting of the symbol confirmation specification command, which is an effect control command for notifying that) is also set, and the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "3". The symbol confirmation designation command set for transmission is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. By repeatedly executing step S112, variable display of the special symbol, derivation display of the confirmed special symbol, and the like are realized.

The special symbol stop process in step S113 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, a process of determining whether the jackpot flag is in the ON state, or when the jackpot flag is in the ON state, the time saving flag and the probability change flag are turned off, and a predetermined area of the RAM 102 (game control counter setting). The count value of the time reduction counter that counts the remaining number of variable displays executed during the time reduction control, which is provided in the unit, etc., is set to "0", and the production waiting time at the start of the big hit (corresponding to the start of the big hit game state). It is a waiting time until the execution of the effect is started, which is a predetermined time.), And a hit start that specifies the start of the big hit game state based on the special figure display result being "big hit". The process of setting the transmission of the designated command (effect control command) and updating the special figure process flag to "4" is included. In addition, the special symbol stop process includes a process of updating the value of the special symbol process flag to "0" when the jackpot flag is not in the ON state.

The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed.

By these series of processes, at the time of a big hit, the time saving state and the probability change state are temporarily terminated, and at the time of losing, the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time saving is reduced "once". When the remaining variable display that can be executed during the time reduction reaches "0" times, the time reduction flag is turned off and the time reduction state ends. That is, the time saving state (time saving control) ends when the variable display is executed a predetermined number of times (the following initial count value) before the variable display result becomes a "big hit" from the start. Further, when the game state is changed, the effect control board 12 is notified of the changed game state.

The jackpot opening preprocessing in step S114 of FIG. 4 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit opening pre-processing includes that the variable display result is "big hit" and that the start timing of the round game has come (for example, the waiting time for the big hit start effect set above has elapsed. ) Etc., the process of starting the execution of the round game in the big hit game state to open the big winning opening, the process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time from the open state, and the like are included. In this process, for example, the jackpot type is opened according to whether the jackpot type is "non-probability variation" or "probability variation" (it can be specified by the jackpot type buffer setting value stored in the jackpot type buffer). The upper limit of the period may be set. As an example, by setting the upper limit of the period for opening the big prize opening to "29 seconds" corresponding to the jackpot type "non-probability change" or "probability change", the normal open round will be executed. do it. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "5" when a process such as opening the large winning opening is executed. By repeating step S114, waiting until the start timing of the round game and opening of the big winning opening are realized.

The process of opening the jackpot in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “5”. In this big hit opening process, the big winning opening is measured based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is opened, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process of determining whether or not it is time to return the game from the open state to the closed state (or the partially open state), and the timing to return the grand prize opening from the open state to the closed state (of the game ball). When it is determined that the number of pieces reaches a predetermined number (for example, 9 pieces) or the elapsed time reaches the upper limit period set in step S114), the process of returning the large winning opening to the closed state or , The process of starting the measurement of the elapsed time after returning to the closed state is included. Then, when the large winning opening is returned to the closed state, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "6". By repeating step S115, the open state of the large winning opening is maintained until the timing of returning the large winning opening from the open state to the closed state.

The post-processing after opening the jackpot in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the jackpot is open has reached a predetermined upper limit, and a process of determining whether the number of executions of the round game has reached the upper limit, or if the number of times has not reached the upper limit It includes processing to measure the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, such as when the measured elapsed time is the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (in this case). Is, for example, a control command for notifying that the jackpot game state has ended when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, for example, in the process of step S114, the big winning opening is immediately opened. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" by setting to send the jackpot end specification command. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. By repeating step S116, waiting is performed until the large winning opening is opened again.

By repeatedly executing steps S114 to S116, a jackpot game state is realized.

The jackpot end processing of step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In this post-opening process of the jackpot, a process of determining whether or not the number of executions of the round game in which the jackpot is open has reached a predetermined upper limit, and a process of determining whether the number of executions of the round game has reached the upper limit, or if the number of times has not reached the upper limit It includes processing to measure the elapsed time after returning to the closed state. Then, when the next round game is started, such as when the measured elapsed time is the time when the next round game is started, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to "4" (in this case). Is, for example, a control command for notifying that the jackpot game state has ended when the number of executions of the round game reaches the upper limit number of times, for example, in the process of step S114, the big winning opening is immediately opened. The value of the special figure process flag is updated to "7" by setting to send the jackpot end specification command. The command set to be transmitted is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the above-mentioned command control process after the special symbol process process is completed. By repeating step S116, waiting is performed until the large winning opening is opened again.

It should be noted that the time saving state (time saving control) ends only when the next big hit game state is started, out of the execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times and the start of the next big hit game state. You may do it. In this case, it is not necessary to set the initial count value or the time reduction counter itself.

Next, the main operations of the effect control board 12 will be described.

In the effect control board 12, when the power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute a predetermined effect control main process. When the effect control main process is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process to clear the RAM 122, set various initial values, and CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Set the register of the circuit). After that, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit) is turned on. The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses, based on the register setting of the CTC, for example. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off, it waits.

Further, on the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving an effect control command from the main board 11 is generated in addition to the timer interrupt that is generated every time a predetermined time elapses. This interrupt is, for example, an interrupt generated when the effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interrupt occurs due to the effect control INT signal being turned on, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets interrupt disabled, but if a CPU that is not automatically interrupt disabled is used, an interrupt occurs. It is desirable to issue a prohibition order (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt caused by the effect control INT signal being turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal serving as an effect control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in, for example, the effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122. After that, the effect control CPU 120 sets the interrupt enable, and then ends the command reception interrupt process.

When the timer interrupt flag is on, the timer interrupt flag is cleared to turn it off, and command analysis processing is executed. In the command analysis process, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed.

After executing the command analysis process, the effect control process process is executed. In the effect control process processing, for example, various effects such as display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, lighting operation in the light emitting body such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED, and the like. The control content of the effect operation using the device is determined, determined, set, and the like according to the effect control command and the like transmitted from the main board 11. Following the effect control process process, the effect random number update process is executed, and the software updates the numerical data indicating the effect random numbers counted by the random counter of the RAM 122 as various random number values used for the effect control.

FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control process process. In the effect control process process shown in FIG. 15, first, the effect control CPU 120 executes a look-ahead process for setting execution of a look-ahead effect such as a hold / active change effect or a movable body effect (step S160).

FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing an example of the look-ahead process executed in step S160 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 16, first, the effect control CPU 120 receives a start winning opening designation command (first starting winning opening designation command and second starting winning entry opening) transmitted in the start winning prize determination process of FIG. 8 on the main board 11. It is determined whether or not the display result specification command (any of the display result 1 specified command, the display result 2 specified command, and the display result 3 specified command) and the variable category command have been input (any of the specified commands). Step S600). The effect control CPU 120 can recognize the start winning prize by the start winning opening designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize whether the winning determination result corresponding to the starting winning is a big hit or a loss by the display result designation command. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can recognize the variable display variation pattern (whether or not it is super reach, etc.) corresponding to the start winning by the variation category command. It should be noted that these commands may be stored in the start winning command receive command buffer provided in the RAM 122.

If the start winning opening designation command, the display result designation command, and the variable category command are not input (step S600; No), the look-ahead process is terminated. On the other hand, when the start winning opening designation command, the display result designation command, and the variable category command are input (step S600; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold storage number count value indicating the special figure hold storage number to 1. Increase (step S601). The hold storage number count value is provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The hold memory count value is incremented by 1 each time the first start winning slot designation command or the second starting winning slot designation command is input, and the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is input. It decreases by 1 for each command. As a result, the hold storage number count value indicates the current special figure hold storage number.

After increasing the hold storage count value by 1 (step S601), the effect control CPU 120 performs a look-ahead effect execution setting process for setting the execution of the look-ahead effect such as the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect (step S602).

FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing an example of the look-ahead effect execution setting process executed in step S602 of FIG. As shown in FIG. 17, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect such as the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect (step S700). Specifically, in the process of step S700, the presence / absence of execution of the look-ahead effect is determined with reference to the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. In addition, if the commands at the time of starting prize are missed or inconsistent, the look-ahead effect is restricted so that the look-ahead effect is not set until the variable display of the hold information corresponding to those commands is executed (digested). Will be done. Further, when the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted, the look-ahead effect in all modes may not be executed for the look-ahead effect targeting the variable display corresponding to the start winning prize generated within the predetermined period. The look-ahead effect of some aspects may not be executed. Further, in this embodiment, when the look-ahead effect is already being executed, it is restricted so that the process of executing the look-ahead effect for another target is not performed until the variable display to be the notice target is completed. .. Further, the process of executing the look-ahead effect may be restricted during the time reduction control (the look-ahead effect may be executed only in the normal state where the time reduction control is not performed), and the time reduction may be performed. During control, the look-ahead effect is executed based on the second start winning opening designation command (the look-ahead effect for winning the first start winning opening is restricted), and in the normal state where the time saving control is not performed, the first start The look-ahead effect may be executed based on the winning opening designation command (the look-ahead effect for winning a prize in the second starting winning opening is restricted). Further, the execution of the look-ahead effect may be restricted according to the number of hold storages, for example, the pre-reading effect can be executed only when the number of hold storages is 2 or more. In addition, when the look-ahead effect is executed when the number of reserved memories is 1, the hold display to be announced is changed so that it can be recognized (change to the special display mode displayed only when the hold / active change effect is performed). , Each change such as a change in the display mode of the active display is instantly performed for the player. Therefore, when the look-ahead effect is executed when the number of reserved storages is 1, it may be performed only when the display mode has the highest degree of expectation, such as when the final color is "red". According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to the hold display and the active display.

In addition, the variable category commands up to the previous time stored in the received command buffer at the time of starting winning are checked to determine whether or not the look-ahead effect can be executed, and it is determined that the variable category is feasible. The look-ahead effect may be executed only when this is done (the look-ahead effect may be restricted if it cannot be executed). For example, all the variable categories specified by the variable category command stored in the start winning command buffer received before the latest variable category command are read, and all read are "non-reach". When the variation category corresponding to the variable display mode is specified, it may be determined that the variation category is capable of executing the look-ahead effect. According to this, in each variable display until the variable display to be notified is started, the look-ahead effect can be executed when all the variable display modes are "non-reach". Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reach effect from being executed in the middle of the look-ahead effect and impairing the continuity of the look-ahead effect.

FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a configuration example of a look-ahead effect execution determination table. In the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, when both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are executed, when only the hold / active change effect is executed and the movable body effect is not executed, the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are executed. When only the movable body effect is executed without executing the movable body effect (when the above is the case where the look-ahead effect is executed), when both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are not executed (when the look-ahead effect is not executed), respectively. On the other hand, different determination ratios are set depending on whether the winning determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to have been input in step S600 of FIG. 16 is a big hit or a loss. As shown in the figure, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect differs depending on the corresponding pending winning determination result, and in the case of a big hit, the rate of execution of the look-ahead effect is higher than in the case of loss. Further, even when the look-ahead effect is executed, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of performing both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed. The look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18 is stored in, for example, the RAM 122. The effect control CPU 120 executes both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect based on the look-ahead effect execution determination table and the winning determination result indicated by the display result designation command determined to have been input in step S600. Whether to execute only the hold / active change effect and not the movable body effect, or to execute only the movable body effect without executing the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect, or to execute the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect. Decide if you don't want to do both. That is, in the process of step S700 of FIG. 17, when the look-ahead effect is executed, whether the hold / active change effect is executed, the movable body effect is executed, or both are executed, as well as whether or not the look-ahead effect is executed. The type of look-ahead production is also decided at once. In addition to this, it is decided in two stages, such as determining whether or not to execute the look-ahead effect first, and then determining the type of the look-ahead effect to be executed when it is decided to execute the look-ahead effect. You may do it.

Returning to FIG. 17, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the decision in step S700 determines whether or not the hold / active change effect is executed (step S701). When it is determined not to execute the hold / active change effect (step S701; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process.

When it is decided to execute the hold / active change effect (step S701; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 refers to the final color determination table shown in FIG. 19 and finally changes the color (final color). Is determined (step S706). As described above, in this embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, the pending change effect only makes the notice target recognizable by the player (changes to a special display mode), and is the first time in the active change effect. Although an example in which the display color changes is shown, for example, the display color may be changed stepwise in the hold change effect. Specifically, a plurality of hold / active change effect patterns may be prepared so that the display color can be changed each time the hold display shifts. In the hold / active change effect pattern, for example, the hold order indicating the number of the hold corresponding to the start winning prize counting from the oldest hold is the third (hold 3) and the second according to the number of hold memories. (Hold 2) The mode of the color of the hold display when it becomes the first (hold 1) and the mode of color change, and the active display when the variable display corresponding to the start winning is being executed (when it becomes active). It suffices if the color and the mode of the color change are shown. In the process of step S706, the final display color may be determined including the case where the color is changed stepwise.

FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a configuration example of the final color determination table. In the final color determination table, the final colors of "white", "blue", "green", and "red" are set to be determined at different ratios according to the variable display result. In the final color determination table in this embodiment, the case where the final color is "red" has the highest percentage of jackpots, followed by "green", followed by "blue" and "white". The ratio is set low. In the case of "green" and "red", the determination ratio is set so that the super reach or higher is confirmed. As described above, in the hold / active change effect in which the display color changes to green or red, all the hold display and the active display being displayed may be enlarged, so when the enlarged display is performed, the display may be enlarged. , It means that it is definitely notified that the variable display corresponding to the hold display to be notified will be at least super reach. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the enlarged display will be performed.

Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S706, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the final color determined in the process of step S706 is “green” or “red” (step S707). .. When the final color is neither "green" nor "red", that is, "white" or "blue" (step S707; No), the effect control CPU 120 is all displayed including the hold display to be announced. The enlargement mode setting for magnifying and displaying the hold display and the active display of the above is determined to be none (step S708). As a result, in the hold / active change effect that changes to "white" or "blue", the enlarged display is not performed, and the small screen as the specific display area is not displayed in the image display device 5. After executing the process of step S708, the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of step S707 that the final color is "green" or "red" (step S707), the effect control CPU 120 displays all the pending displays including the pending display to be announced. The presence / absence of the enlargement mode setting for displaying the active display in an enlarged manner is determined with reference to the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 20 (step S709).

FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a configuration example of an enlarged mode setting presence / absence determination table. In the enlargement mode setting presence / absence determination table shown in FIG. 20, the display result specification command determined to have been input in step S600 of FIG. 16 is used for the enlargement mode setting for performing the enlargement display and the non-expansion mode setting for not performing the enlargement display. Different decision ratios are set depending on whether the winning judgment result is a big hit or a loss. As shown in the figure, the percentage determined to have the enlarged mode setting to perform the enlarged display is different depending on the corresponding pending winning judgment result, and in the case of a big hit, it is determined to have the enlarged mode setting than in the case of loss. The percentage is high. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the enlarged display is performed.

Returning to FIG. 17, after executing the process of step S709, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is determined in step S709 that the expansion mode is set (step S710). If it is determined without setting the expansion mode (step S710; No), the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the expansion mode is set (step S710; Yes), whether or not the effect control CPU 120 is determined to perform the movable body effect in step S700, that is, the hold / active change effect and the movable body It is determined whether or not it is decided to perform both body effects (step S711). When the movable body effect is not performed, that is, only the hold / active change effect is performed (step S711; No), the effect control CPU 120 turns on the enlargement flag indicating that only the hold / active change effect for performing the enlarged display is executed. (Step S712). The expansion flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S712, the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the movable body effect is to be performed, that is, when both the active change effect and the movable body effect are performed (step S711; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 is held to perform the enlarged display. The active change effect is executed, and the movable body effect is further performed, that is, the overlapping flag indicating that the movable body effect to be executed is the above-mentioned movable body special effect is set to the on state (step S713). The duplication flag may be provided in the RAM 122. After executing the process of step S713, the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead effect execution setting process. It is also said that a specific condition is satisfied when the duplicate flag is set to the on state, that is, both the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and the movable body effect are performed.

Returning to FIG. 16, after executing the process of step S602, the effect control CPU 120 performs a process of adding a hold display or an active display (step S603). For example, when the number of reserved memories is 1 and the condition for starting the special figure game is satisfied, the effect control CPU 120 controls to add the active display to the active display area 5HA, and in other cases, it controls to add the active display. The effect control CPU 120 controls to add a hold display according to the hold order to the start winning memory display area 5H. As described above, the conditions for starting the special figure game are the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure and the first condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure. There are two start conditions. For example, when the previous special figure game or the jackpot game state is completed and the variable display is not executed on the image display device 5 and the demo image or the like is displayed, the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied. It becomes a state.

Specifically, the effect control CPU 120 determines the contents of the hold display and the active display (gray display as the initial state) to be displayed by the image display device 5, and displays the contents to the display control unit 123 according to the determination. Output a control command. The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 determines the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 based on the display control command from the effect control CPU 120, generates image data, and activates the active display area 5HA. Is displayed in the active display, and the hold display is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H. After executing the process of step S603, the effect control CPU 120 ends the look-ahead process.

It will be described again by returning to FIG. After the look-ahead process in step S160, the effect control CPU 120 responds to the value of the effect process flag (initially "0") provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control flag setting unit). One of the processes of steps S170 to S177 is selected and executed.

The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. The variable display start wait processing is based such as whether it has received the first FIG pattern change start designation command or a second symbol variation start designation command from the main board 11, the variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 It includes a process for determining whether or not to start. When the first symbol variation start designation command or the second symbol variation start designation command is received and it is determined that the variable display of the decorative symbol on the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to "1". Will be done.

The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display start setting process corresponds to the start of variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and the decorative symbol in the image display device 5. In order to perform the variable display of the above, the look-ahead effect set in the process of step S602 of FIG. It includes processing to determine the effect control pattern. The variable display start setting process ends when the value of the effect process flag is updated to "2".

The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 corresponds to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the predetermined area of the RAM 122 (for example, the effect control timer setting unit), and the effect control determined in step S171. Various control data are read from the pattern, and various effect controls are performed during the variable display of the decorative pattern.

The special figure hit waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure hit waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. Then, when the hit start designation command is received, the hit start designation command specifies the start of the jackpot game state, and the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command received before that is "probability change". Or, if it is "non-probability change", the value of the effect process flag is updated to "4". In addition, when the effect control process timer times out without receiving the hit start designation command (when the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses), it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is "missing". Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

The process when the large winning opening is normally opened in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “4”. In this process when the large winning opening is normally opened, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the effect content in the “probability change” or “non-probability change” big hit game state, and the effect image based on the setting content. Is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting the command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and the command (electricity) to the lamp control board 14 is output. Various effect controls (for example, that a big hit has occurred) in a "probable change" or "non-probable change" big hit game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output of the decoration signal). , Including the effect control to be notified by the image display device 5). Further, in the process when the large winning opening is normally opened, for example, the value of the effect control process flag is set to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process, in response to receiving the jackpot end designation command from the main board 11. Update.

The ending effect process of step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “5”. In this ending effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state, and displays an effect image based on the set contents in the display area of the image display device 5. , Output voice and sound effect from speakers 8L and 8R by outputting command (sound effect signal) to voice control board 13, and game effect lamp 9 and decoration by outputting command (illumination signal) to lamp control board 14. Various effect controls at the end of the jackpot game state, such as turning on / off / blinking the LED, are executed. After that, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value "0".

FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of FIG. 15 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in FIG. 21, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the special figure display result is "missing" based on, for example, a display result designation command transmitted from the main board 11. Determine (step S521). When it is determined that the special symbol display result is "missing" (step S521; Yes), for example, the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command transmitted from the main board 11 changes the variable display mode of the decorative symbol. It is determined whether or not the non-reach variation pattern corresponds to the case of “non-reach” which is not the reach mode (step S522).

When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the final stop symbols that constitute the non-reach combination (step S522; Yes). Step S523). As an example, in the process of step S523, first, the effect control CPU 120 determines the left fixed symbol updated by the effect random counter or the like provided in a predetermined area (for example, the effect control counter setting unit) of the random number circuit 124 or the RAM 122. By extracting the numerical data indicating the random number value for use and referring to the left confirmed symbol determination table prepared in advance stored in the ROM 121, the “left” of the confirmed decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 The left fixed decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L is determined. Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the right-determined symbol, which is updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect, is extracted, and the right-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. For example, among the fixed decorative symbols, the right fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, it is preferable that the symbol number of the right fixed decorative symbol is determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left fixed decorative symbol by the setting in the right confirmed symbol determination table. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 and prepared is referred to. For example, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined.

When it is determined in step S522 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S522; No), a combination of fixed decorative symbols to be the final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S524). As an example, in the process of step S524, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a left-right confirmed symbol updated by a random number circuit 124 or a random counter for effect is extracted, and left and right stored in advance in ROM 121 and prepared. By referring to the finalized symbol determination table, among the finalized decorative symbols, the symbol numbers that are stopped and displayed in the "left" and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 are displayed. Determine the same decorative pattern. Further, the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the medium-determined symbol updated by the random number circuit 124 or the random counter for effect is extracted, and the medium-determined symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 is referred to. Therefore, among the fixed decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the symbol number of the medium-fixed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol, and the fixed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, an arbitrary value is used. By adding or subtracting (for example, "1") to the symbol number of the medium fixed decorative symbol, the fixed decorative symbol may be a reach combination instead of a jackpot combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-fixed decorative symbol, the difference (design difference) between the left-fixed decorative symbol and the right-fixed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-fixed decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. ..

When it is determined in step S521 that the special symbol display result is not "missing" (step S521; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines the combination of the final stop symbols constituting the jackpot combination. (Step S527). As an example, in the process of step S527, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot confirmed symbol updated by a random number circuit 124, a random counter for effect, or the like is extracted. Subsequently, by referring to the jackpot confirmation symbol determination table stored and prepared in advance in the ROM 121, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 Determines decorative symbols with the same symbol number that is stopped and displayed along with 5C and 5R. At this time, for example, the same decorative symbol is determined according to the jackpot type specified by the display result designation command or the like.

Information on the mode and stop order of the left fixed decorative symbol, the right fixed decorative symbol, and the middle fixed decorative symbol set in steps S523, S524, and S527 is stored in, for example, the RAM 122.

After executing any of the processes of steps S523, S524, and S527, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the duplicate flag is set to the ON state (step S528). As described above, the duplicate flag is a flag indicating that the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display is executed and the movable body effect is further performed, and is set to the ON state in the process of step S712 of FIG. .. When it is determined that the duplication flag is set to the ON state (step S528; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 has an effect on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5 as a movable body effect. The movable body special effect setting process for performing the setting for executing the movable body special effect for displaying the image is executed (step S529). Specifically, in the process of step S529, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold to be announced is performed, and the rotation operation is performed. At the same time, a setting is made to display the effect image on a small screen as a specific display area. After executing the process of step S529, the effect control CPU 120 performs a hold / active change effect execution setting process for setting to execute the hold / active change effect (step S530). In the process of step S530, all the hold display and the active display being displayed including the hold display to be notified are set to be enlarged and displayed, and the action effect is performed at the timing when the hold display to be notified is first shifted. Further, the display color of the active display is set to be changed by performing an action effect at the timing of shifting to the active display area 5HA. Further, in the process of step S530, a small screen as a specific display area is displayed on the image display device 5, and an image displayed in the hold / active change effect (for example, a hold display, an active display, a character image in the action effect, etc.) ) Is set to be displayed on the small screen, and after the hold / active change effect is completed, the display on the small screen as the specific display area is finished and the setting is made to restore the original display. The process of step S529 may be executed after the process of step S530.

When it is determined in step S528 that the duplicate flag is in the off state (step S528; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the movable body effect (step S531). When executing the movable body effect (step S531; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 performs the movable body effect setting process for executing the movable body effect (step S532). Specifically, in the process of step S532, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of each variable display in a plurality of variable displays until the variable display of the hold to be announced is performed, and the rotation operation is performed. At the same time, a setting is made to display an effect image in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5.

After executing the process of step S532, or when it is determined in step S531 that the movable body effect is not executed (step S531; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute the hold / active change effect. (Step S533). When it is determined to execute the hold / active change effect (step S533; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 sets the hold / active change effect execution setting for executing the hold / active change effect according to the setting status of the expansion flag. Perform the process (step S534). As described above, the expansion flag is set to the ON state in step S712 of FIG. In the process of step S534, when the enlargement flag is set to the ON state, all the hold display and the active display being displayed including the hold display of the notice target are set to be enlarged and displayed, and the notice target is set. The action effect is performed at the timing when the hold display is first shifted, and the display color of the active display is changed at the timing when the hold display is shifted to the active display area 5HA. On the other hand, if the enlargement flag is not set to the on state and is in the off state, no setting or action effect is performed to enlarge all the hold display and active display being displayed, including the hold display to be announced. , The display mode is changed so that the notice target can be recognized at the timing when the hold display to be notified is first shifted, and the display color of the active display is changed at the timing when the notice target is shifted to the active display area 5HA. Only make settings to change (without directing).

After executing the process of step S530 or step S534, or when it is determined in step S533 that the hold / active change effect is not executed (step S533; No), the effect control CPU 120 is for executing another effect. The effect pattern setting process is performed (step S535).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern, which is the pattern to be used later, based on the contents set in the processes of steps S528 to S534 and the effect pattern set in the process of step S529. Select from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S536).

Subsequently, the effect control CPU 120 sets the initial value of the effect control process timer provided in a predetermined area (effect control timer setting unit, etc.) of the RAM 122 in response to the variation pattern specified by, for example, the variation pattern command. (Step S537).

Then, the effect control CPU 120 sets the image display device 5 to start the variation of the decorative pattern or the like (step S538). At this time, for example, the image display device 5 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 a display control command specified by the display control data included in the effect control pattern determined as the pattern to be used in step S536. The variation of the decorative symbol may be started in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the display area of.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 makes settings for updating the hold display in the start winning memory display area 5H and the active display in the active display area 5HA in response to the start of the variable display (step S539). Here, when the hold display is displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H, the effect control CPU 120 erases the hold display corresponding to the hold order 1 and moves the remaining hold displays one by one (shift). ). On the other hand, when the hold display is not displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H and only the active display in the active display area 5HA is displayed, the effect control CPU 120 does not update the display.

After that, the effect control CPU 120 updates the value of the effect process flag to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect process during variable display (step S540), and then ends the variable display start setting process.

FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S172 of FIG. 15 as the variable display effect process. In the effect processing during variable display shown in FIG. 22, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern has elapsed based on, for example, the effect control process timer value (step S801). ). As an example, in the process of step S541, the effect control process timer value is updated (for example, 1 is subtracted), and when the end code is read from the effect control pattern corresponding to the updated effect control process timer value, or the like. It may be determined that the variable display time has elapsed.

If the variable display time has not elapsed in step S541 (step S801; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the movable body effect execution period for executing the movable body effect (step S801; No). Step S802). The movable body effect execution period is set in steps S529 and S532 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the movable body effect execution period is in effect (step S802; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the duplicate flag is set to the ON state (step S803). When the duplication flag is set to the ON state (step S803; Yes), the movable body 99 is rotated and the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area according to the rotating motion. Control is performed (step S805). On the other hand, when the duplication flag is off (step S803; No), the movable body 99 is rotated and the effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 in accordance with the rotation operation. (Step S804).

After performing the processing of step S805 or step S804, or when it is determined in step S802 that it is not the movable body effect execution period (step S803; No), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect. It is determined whether or not it is the hold / active change effect execution period (step S806). The hold / active change effect execution period is set in steps S530 and S534 shown in FIG. When it is determined that the hold / active change effect execution period is reached (step S806; Yes), the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect according to the contents set in step S530 or step S534 of FIG. (Step S807). Specifically, in the process of step S807, when the enlargement mode setting for enlarging the display is performed, the enlargement control for enlarging and displaying all the hold display and the active display in the display including the hold display to be announced is performed. At the same time, a character for performing an action effect is displayed, and control for changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display is performed, and a display other than the display related to the hold / active change effect is performed on a small screen as a specific display area. Control etc. are performed. Specifically, on the small screen as the specific display area, all the displays other than the display related to the hold / active change effect, such as the background image, the variable display, and the notice effect other than the hold / active change effect, are performed. On the other hand, when the magnifying mode setting for performing the magnifying display is not performed, the magnifying control is not performed, and the control for changing the display mode of the hold display and the active display is performed without executing the action effect.

After executing the process of step S807, or when it is determined in step S806 that it is not the hold / active change effect execution period (step S806; No), the effect control CPU 120 sets the duplicate flag or the expansion flag to the ON state. It is determined whether or not this is done (step S808). When it is determined that the duplicate flag or the expansion flag is set to the ON state (S808; Yes), it is determined whether or not the hold / active change effect execution period has expired (step S809). When the hold / active change effect execution period ends (step S809; Yes), the display control by the small screen as a special area, that is, the specific display area control is ended, and the display is restored (step S810). After executing the process of step S810, the effect control CPU 120 clears the overlapping flag or the expansion flag, which is set to the on state, to the off state (step S811).

After executing the process of step S811, when it is determined in step S808 that both the duplicate flag and the expansion flag are off (step S808; No), or in step S809, the hold / active change effect execution period has not ended. When it is determined (step S809; No), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the reach effect execution period for executing the reach effect (step S812). The reach effect execution period may be predetermined in the effect control pattern selected in response to the predetermined reach effect. When the reach effect execution period is reached in step S812 (step S812; Yes), the effect operation control for executing the reach effect is performed (step S813).

When it is not the reach effect execution period in step S812 (step S812; No), or after the process of step S813 is executed, for example, based on the setting in the special figure variation effect control pattern corresponding to the variation pattern, etc. After performing the effect operation control including the variable display operation of the decorative symbol (step S814), the effect process during the variable display is terminated. If a small screen as a specific display area is displayed, the effect performed in step S814 will be performed on the small screen. Whether or not the small screen display is performed may be determined, for example, by referring to the state of the small screen display flag provided in the RAM 122. The small screen display flag may be set to the on state when the small screen is displayed in the process of step S807, and may be cleared to the off state in the process of step S810.

When the variable display time has elapsed in step S801 (step S801; Yes), it is determined whether or not the symbol determination command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S815). At this time, if the symbol confirmation command is not received (step S815; No), the effect processing during variable display is terminated and the process waits. If the predetermined time elapses without receiving the symbol confirmation command after the variable display time has elapsed, the predetermined error processing is executed in response to the failure to normally receive the symbol confirmation command. You may do so.

When a symbol confirmation command is received in step S815 (step S815; Yes), for example, in variable display of decorative symbols such as transmitting a predetermined display control command to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. Control is performed to derive and display the final stop symbol (fixed decorative symbol) that is the display result (step S816). Subsequently, a predetermined fixed time is set as the waiting time for receiving the hit start designation command (step S817), and the value of the effect process flag is updated to "3", which is a value corresponding to the special figure hit waiting process (step S817). Step S818), the effect processing during variable display is terminated.

Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 25, an effect when a hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and a movable body effect (the movable body effect executed here is a movable body special effect) are performed. The operation will be described. FIG. 23 is a timing chart when the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed (more specifically, the timing when the hold / active change effect for enlarged display and the movable body special effect are performed). It is a chart). FIG. 25 is a diagram showing an example of the effect operation of the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect (more specifically, the effect operation in the case of performing the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display and the movable body special effect). It is a figure which shows an example). In the illustrated example, the third variable display is the variable display of the advance notice target of the look-ahead effect, the variable display of the advance notice target is called target variation, and the hold display of the notice target is called target hold.

First, when the first variable display is started (transition from FIG. 25 (A) to FIG. 25 (B)), the hold / active change effect is executed, and all the hold display and the active display being displayed are enlarged and displayed. (The hold display of the start winning memory display area 5H and the active display of the active display area 5HA shown in FIG. 25 (A) are the hold display and the active display area 5HA of the start prize memory display area 5H shown in FIG. 25 (B). The action effect is executed together with the active display of. It should be noted that the effect may be changed to a star shape (special mode) in connection with the switching of the background without executing the action effect. Further, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by executing the action effect of a different mode between the cases shown in FIGS. 25 (B) and 25 (F). In the illustrated example, the entire active display area 5HA (both the active display AH and the pedestal display AHA) is enlarged and displayed. Further, the display mode of the hold display of the notice target is changed to a star shape (special mode) so that the player can recognize which hold display is the hold display of the notice target (Fig. 25 (B)). Hold display HG). A small screen as a specific display area is displayed in accordance with this (small screen 6DP shown in FIG. 25 (B)). At the same time, as a movable body effect, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display, and an effect image (effect image 44 shown in FIG. 25B) is displayed on a small screen. Is executed (above, FIG. 25B). Further, the background image and the decorative pattern are reduced and displayed on a small screen (the background image 66 and the decorative patterns 5L, 5C, and 5R shown in FIG. 25 (A) are the background image 66 and the decorative pattern shown in FIG. 25 (B). It is reduced and displayed as 5L, 5C, and 5R). As shown in the figure, once the hold / active change effect for enlarged display is executed, the small screen as the specific display area continues to be displayed for at least the period until the hold / active change effect ends. It becomes.

Then, when the first variable display is completed (FIG. 25 (C)) and the second variable display is started, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display, and the movable body special effect is performed. It is executed (FIG. 25 (D)). When the target fluctuation is started, the movable body 99 is rotated for 2 seconds from the start of the target fluctuation, the movable body special effect is executed, and the action effect is performed on the active display (FIG. 25 (FIG. 25). F)). Subsequently, when the movable body special effect is completed, the display color of the active display changes to the final color determined in step S706 of FIG. 17 as a result of the action effect (active display of the special mode shown in FIG. 25 (F)). The aspect of 5HG changes to the aspect of active display 5HK). In the illustrated example, an example in which the color has changed to red is shown (FIG. 25 (G)). When the hold / active change effect ends, the enlarged display ends in accordance with the end (as shown in FIG. 25 (H), the hold display of the start winning memory display area 5H and the active display of the active display area 5HA (pedestal display). (Including) is displayed in its original size). After that, the control by the small screen is terminated by hiding the specific display area, and the original display (decorative symbols 5L, 5C, 5R are also displayed in the original size, and the background image 66 is also displayed in the original size). (Fig. 25 (H)). Then, a production operation such as a reach effect is performed. As shown in FIG. 23, the hold / active change effect in this embodiment ends after the movable body effect (in this case, the movable body special effect) is completed. In addition, the small screen as the specific display area is deleted after the hold / active change effect is completed. Therefore, the end timing of the effect is clarified, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. In addition, it is possible to reduce (prevent) the sense of incongruity caused by ending the movable body production when it is in a halfway state. Further, as shown in FIG. 25, on the small screen as the specific display area, displays related to the hold / active change effect (for example, hold display, active display, character in action effect) such as variable display of background image and decorative pattern, effect image, etc. Display other than (image, etc.) is performed, and hold display and active display are not performed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity caused by displaying a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display such as a hold display or an active display in a plurality of display areas.

FIG. 24 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the movable body effect, and more specifically, is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation when only the movable body effect is performed as the look-ahead effect. As described above, the movable body effect includes a special movable body effect that displays an effect image for effectively conspicuous that the movable body 99 is operating on a small screen as a specific display area, and the effect. Since a (normal) movable body effect of displaying an image in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5 can be executed, the difference will be described. As shown in FIG. 24 (A), the third hold display is stored during the variable display (three hold displays are displayed in the start winning memory display area 5H shown in FIG. 24 (A), and the active display area 5HA The active display AH and the pedestal display AHA are displayed), and the case where the hold is determined as the target hold will be described as an example. As shown in FIG. 24 (B), when the variable display being executed ends and the next variable display is started, as shown in FIG. 24 (C), the movable body effect is produced for 2 seconds from the start of the variable display. As a result, the movable body 99 rotates, and an effect image (effect image 44 shown in FIG. 24C) is displayed. In this case, since the enlarged display is not performed, FIG. 25 (B) and FIG. 25 (D), unlike such FIG 25 (F), the effect image is movable body 99 in the images display device 5 as shown (The effect image 44 is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 as shown in FIG. 24C). Further, unlike FIG. 25 (B), the background image (background image 66 shown in FIG. 24 (A)) and the decorative design (decorative design 5L, 5C, 5R shown in FIG. 24 (A)) are displayed on the image display device 5. It is displayed and not displayed on the small screen. Then, when 2 seconds have passed from the start of the variable display, the movable body effect ends, the rotational operation of the movable body 99 stops, and the effect image is also erased. After that, until the fluctuation corresponding to the target hold (target fluctuation) is started (including the target fluctuation), the movable body effect is executed for each fluctuation.

When the movable body effect is executed a plurality of times before the target changes as in the movable body effect in FIGS. 24 and 25, the speed of the rotation operation in each time is gradually increased, and the color of the effect image is changed each time. You may change it. In this case, the effect image of the final color in the hold / active change effect may be displayed in the final movable body effect. According to this, a sense of unity in the production can be maintained, and the game entertainment can be improved. The movable body 99 may also be provided with an LED or a lamp, and may be lit or blinked in various colors according to the rotation operation. For example, the movable body 99 may be provided with an LED to emit light in a color according to the degree of expectation and be rotated (that is, the movable body effect may be executed in a different manner depending on the degree of expectation). Then, the color of the effect image displayed as the effect auxiliary display may be a color corresponding to the emission color of the LED. According to this, the effect of the effect can be improved. In addition, the execution pattern of the production auxiliary display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent a deterioration in the game interest. Further, in the movable body effect, the operation sound may be output in accordance with the rotational movement of the movable body 99. In this case, even if the speaker to be output is different depending on whether the moving body effect being executed is a movable body special effect that displays an effect image on a small screen as a specific display area or a normal movable body effect. Good. For example, in the normal movable body effect, the operating sound is output by the speaker 8L and the speaker 8R, while in the movable body special effect, the speaker on the side where the specific display area is displayed (in the example shown in FIG. 25). Since a small screen as a specific display area is displayed on the left side of the image display device, the operating sound may be output only from the speaker 8L). In addition, during the period in which the small screen as the specific display area is displayed (that is, the period in which the hold / active change effect is executed), all the audio outputs related to the display performed on the small screen as the specific display area are output. The output may be made only from the speaker on the side where the specific display area is displayed. According to this, the effect of production can be enhanced.

As described above, according to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment, the following effects can be obtained.

The effect control CPU 120 can execute two types of effects such as a hold / active change effect and a movable body effect as a look-ahead effect. Then, when both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are executed, the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable body is displayed in a mode different from the normal state. The production can be executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the game entertainment due to a decrease in the visibility of the effect.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect, the effect image is displayed on a small screen as a specific display area displayed on the image display device 5, and the movable body effect is displayed. Notifies the player that is being executed. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the movable body production is being executed, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the hold / active change effect that enlarges the display as the hold / active change effect. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that the display mode is changed as a hold / active change effect, and it is possible to improve the game interest.

The effect control CPU 120 rotates the movable body 99 as a movable body effect, and displays an effect image as an effect auxiliary display so that the operation of the movable body 99 is effectively conspicuous. Then, when only the movable body effect is performed, the effect image is displayed in the vicinity of the movable body 99 in the image display device 5, whereas when both the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect which perform the enlarged display are performed, the effect image is displayed. Displays the effect image on a small screen as a specific display area. Therefore, the production auxiliary display can be appropriately performed, and the game entertainment can be improved.

Further, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the hold / active change effect that enlarges the display, the display (background) other than the display related to the hold / active change effect (for example, hold display, active display, character image in the action effect, etc.). (Variable display of images and decorative patterns, effect images, etc.) are all performed on the small screen as a specific display area, and hold display and active display are not displayed on the small screen. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a sense of incongruity caused by displaying a corresponding display corresponding to a variable display such as a hold display or an active display in a plurality of display areas. In addition, the effect control CPU may perform all displays other than the display related to the hold / active change effect, such as a background image, a variable display, and a notice effect other than the hold / active change effect, on a small screen as a specific display area. It is possible. Therefore, the visibility of the effect can be improved, the effect of the effect can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 ends the hold / active change effect after the end of the movable body effect, hides the small screen as the specific display area after the end of the hold / active change effect, and ends the control by the small screen. .. Therefore, the end timing of the effect is clarified, and the effect of the effect can be enhanced. Further, the effect control CPU 120 changes the hold / active change effect so that the player can recognize which hold the advance notice target of the look-ahead effect is. That is, when the hold / active change effect is performed, the display mode is changed to a unique one. Therefore, the target to which the hold / active change effect is performed becomes clear, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

Further, the effect control CPU 120 can execute the movable body effect according to the degree of expectation, and displays the effect image as the effect auxiliary display in the movable body effect. Then, when a hold / active change effect for further enlarged display is performed (when a specific condition for performing both the hold / active change effect for enlarged display and the movable body effect is satisfied), the effect image is displayed. , It is possible to display at a different position compared to the case where the hold / active change effect is not performed (when the specific condition is not satisfied). Therefore, the execution pattern of the production auxiliary display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed. More specifically, when a hold / active change effect for enlarged display is performed, the effect control CPU 120 executes a movable body special effect as the movable body effect to display an effect image on a small screen as a specific display area. indicate. Therefore, it is possible to easily recognize that a specific condition is satisfied, and it is possible to improve the game entertainment.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the active display area 5HA is arranged close to the start winning memory display area 5H on the screen of the image display device 5, and the active display is displayed close to the hold display. As a result, when the hold display is deleted, the player can pay attention to the active display.

The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. For example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 does not have to have all the technical features shown in the above-described embodiment, and has been described in the above-described embodiment so as to solve at least one problem in the prior art. It may have a structure of parts. In addition, at least a part of each of the following modifications may be combined.

In the above embodiment, in the hold / active change effect for which the enlarged display is performed, it is possible to recognize which hold is the variable display to be notified by performing the action effect (hold / active change effect is performed). An example (see FIG. 25B) is shown (which is a special display mode that is displayed only in case), but this is an example. For example, the action effect may be performed only when the display mode of the active display is changed, or the action effect may not be performed when the display mode is a special display mode. The timing of changing to the special display mode may be the timing at which the hold / active change effect is started, or the timing at which the hold (target hold) corresponding to the variable display of the advance notice is shifted (how many times). It may be decided whether it is the timing of the shift). Further, in the above embodiment, when the hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to "green" or "red" is executed, the enlarged display may not be performed. When the hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to "green" or "red" is executed, 100% enlarged display may be performed. Further, even when the hold / active change effect in which the display mode of the active display changes to "white" or "blue" is executed, the enlarged display may be performed. Further, in the above embodiment, when the enlarged display is performed in the hold / active change effect, an example is shown in which the target of the enlarged display is all the hold display and the active display itself being displayed, but in addition to this, the hold display is shown. In addition, a display unit or a display area of the active display (for example, a pedestal display or a region-divided portion) may be enlarged and displayed.

Further, in the above embodiment, the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed as the look-ahead effect, and the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect for enlarging the display are performed in the same period. An example is shown in which the execution mode of the movable body effect is different (the movable body special effect is performed), but this is an example. The condition is not limited to the two types of effects executed as the look-ahead effects being performed in the same period. For example, notices for the fluctuations performed during variable display, such as notices by characters, notices using characters and telops, and notices of background changes that change the mode of the background, are performed during the same period, or jackpot control is in progress. It suffices if two types of effects performed in an arbitrary state are performed in the same period, such as the effects performed in the same period, and if one effect is executed, the other effect becomes difficult to see. For example, the type of effect may be any effect. Further, one effect may be a look-ahead effect, and the other effect may be a notice effect for the fluctuation performed during the variable display. Further, the effects executed in the same period are not limited to two types, and may be three or more types. In this case, the specific display area may be further displayed. Further, when three or more kinds of effects are executed in the same period, a plurality of effects may be executed on a small screen as a specific display area. Further, by displaying a pseudo-continuous chance symbol which is a pseudo-continuous chance eye on a small screen as a specific display area, expansion control may be performed over a plurality of fluctuations in the fluctuation. Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which the specific display area is displayed in the image display device 5 is shown, but in a game machine or the like provided with a sub liquid crystal in addition to the image display device 5, the specific display area is displayed. It is not necessary to do so, and the display performed on the small screen as the specific display area may be performed on the sub liquid crystal. Further, in the above embodiment, on the condition that the hold / active change effect and the movable body effect are performed in the same period, the execution mode of the movable body effect is different, and the hold display and the active display are enlarged and displayed with priority. An example of displaying in is shown, but on the contrary, the movable body effect may be prioritized. Specifically, a notice effect for operating the movable body 99 to fill the screen of the image display device 5 can be executed, and in that case, the hold display or the active display may be displayed on a small screen as a specific display area. ..

Further, in the above embodiment, an example in which various images displayed on the small screen have the same ratio as the images displayed on the image display device 5, that is, the screen size of the image display device 5 is 10. If the screen size of the small screen is 1, the image displayed on the small screen is shown as an example in which the ratio is 1/10 of the size displayed on the image display device 5, but this is an example. is there. As described above, on the small screen as the specific display area, all the displays other than the images displayed in the hold / active change effect such as the hold display, the active display, and the character image in the action effect are displayed. Of these, when performing an effect that requires the player's operation, such as a button effect, only the image that prompts the operation (promotion display) should not be reduced by the same ratio as the image displayed on the image display device 5. (The small screen may be reduced to 1/10, and the button display as the promotion display may be reduced to 2/10). According to this, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking the promotion display. Further, while the small screen is displayed as the specific display area, the execution of an effect that requires the operation of the player, such as a button effect, may be prohibited. According to this, the player's attention can be drawn to the hold / active change effect. It should be noted that the button effect executed after the hold / active change effect is completed may be made executable.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the hold / active change effect for enlarging the display is executed, the action effect is executed and the display mode of the active display is a display having a relatively high degree of expectation such as "green" or "red". An example of changing to a mode is shown, which is an example. For example, the action effect that changes the active display may include a success effect and a failure effect. Specifically, when a success effect is performed, the display mode of the active display changes from the special display mode to "green" or "red", while when a failure effect is performed, the special display mode is used. Changes from to the normal aspect of being "gray". Further, when the failure effect is performed, the display mode may be changed to "white" or "blue" instead of the normal mode.

In the above embodiment, in order to facilitate understanding, in the hold change effect, the notice target is only recognizable by the player (changes to a special display mode), and the display color changes for the first time in the active change effect. As shown, the display color may be changed in the hold change effect. Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example in which the action effect is not performed in the hold / active change effect in which the enlarged display is not performed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by performing the hold change effect as shown in FIG. 26, the operation related to the variable display corresponding to the hold display may be announced. In the illustrated example, the case where the hold change effect as the hold / active change effect without the enlarged display is executed is shown as an example, but in the hold change effect as the hold / active change effect with the enlarged display. Is also applicable.

FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of an effect operation of the hold change effect. In the illustrated hold change effect, whether or not the color of the target hold display changes when the color ball thrown toward one of the hold displays hits the target hold display and breaks (that is, acts). It is a production to show. The setting here is that the color ball always hits the target hold display, and the player is entertained with the effect of whether or not the ball breaks. Of course, it may be set so that the thrown ball does not hit the target hold display. If the ball breaks and the color of the hold display changes, the production result is successful, and if the ball does not break and the color of the hold display does not change, it fails. When it succeeds, it is more likely that the hold display will be a big hit than when it fails. The change of the color of the hold display to a color with a high degree of expectation such as a big hit is also called "upstart".

In the illustrated hold change effect, one feature is that the speed of the color ball thrown toward one of the hold displays slows down in the middle. In particular, the length of the deceleration period is not uniform, and is determined from at least two types, and the case where the deceleration period is long is more likely to be successful than the case where the deceleration period is short. However, regardless of which deceleration period is selected, the timing at which the ball starts decelerating after being thrown is the same.

On the screen of the image display device 5, various images are displayed during the variable display of the decorative pattern indicated by the three downward arrows. At the lower end, an image TH or H displaying the generated hold storage information is displayed corresponding to the number of hold storage information (hereinafter, referred to as a hold storage image or hold display). In these hold display, the hold storage image may be displayed in a format in which the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number are distinguished. In the active display area 5HA at the lower left of the screen, a position display AHA (pedestal display AHA) indicating the display position of the active display is displayed. The active display AH is displayed above the pedestal display AHA. In addition, when it is executed as a hold change effect in the hold / active change effect that enlarges the display, the variable display of the decorative symbol indicated by the three downward arrows in the illustrated example is specified as shown in the above embodiment. It may be performed on a small screen as a display area. In this case, the hold display and the active display shown in FIG. 26 may be enlarged (note that the movable body 99 is omitted in the illustrated example).

A character 930 having a color ball 931 appears during the variable display of the decorative pattern with reference to FIG. 26A. The appearance timing of the character 930 can be set in various ways. However, it is necessary to prevent the production from being wasted by shifting the hold display during the production period from the appearance of the character 930 to the result of success or failure of the production. Therefore, the character 930 appears at a stage where the remaining period of the variable display is sufficiently longer than the effect period.

The character 930 throws the color ball 931 toward the second hold display TH from the left among the four hold displays appearing on the screen. The time from when the character 930 throws the color ball 931 until the color ball 931 hits the hold display TH is a predetermined period. The length of the predetermined period differs depending on whether the production succeeds or fails, but may be the same. In any case, in the predetermined period, the rate of color balls 93 1 changes.

The color ball 931 moves at a constant speed from the time it is pitched until a certain period of time elapses (until it moves a predetermined distance), but when a certain period of time elapses, the speed decelerates. That is, the deceleration period is entered. The situation is shown in FIG. 26 (b). The effect of such deceleration control is, for example, the effect of slow motion reproduction. The deceleration period is 3 seconds or 5 seconds. However, regardless of which deceleration period is set, the period from when the character 930 throws the ball to when it enters the deceleration period is the same. After the deceleration period due to such slow motion reproduction, the speed of the color ball 931 returns to the initial speed, and the color ball 931 eventually collides with the target hold display TH. The effect may be completed while decelerating without returning to the initial speed, or the speed after the end of the deceleration period may be different from the initial speed or the speed in the deceleration period.

After that, the pattern of the production is a success pattern in which the colliding color ball 931 is broken and the paint inside covers the target hold display, and the color of the hold display is changed to a different color from the original color, and the collided color ball 931 is broken. It bounces without bounces and is divided into a failure pattern in which the color of the hold display does not change. FIG. 26 (c) shows a success pattern, and FIG. 26 (d) shows a failure pattern. In the case of a success pattern, the push button 31B vibrates before the color ball 931 breaks, and the success pattern is notified to the player (button notification effect). As a result, the player's expectation can be improved. Of course, the push button 31B may or may not vibrate. It should be noted that such advance notice may be performed by voice or image in place of the push button 31B or in addition to the push button 31B. Further, the button notification effect may be determined by lottery. In such a case, it is desirable that the jackpot expectation is higher when the push button 31B vibrates than when the push button 31B does not vibrate. Further, the vibration of the push button 31B may be adjusted in strength. In such a case, the lottery including the strength of the push button 31B may be performed at the time of the lottery for the button notification effect. Then, the jackpot expectation may be higher when the push button 31B vibrates strongly than when the push button 31B vibrates weakly.

In the success pattern, the color of the hold display changes from the original color (eg gray) to one of several colors. For example, its color variations are white, blue, green, and red. Such a difference in color represents, for example, a difference in the degree of expectation that the variable display corresponding to the hold display will be a big hit. For example, red has the highest expectation of a big hit, followed by green and blue in that order. The player can provide a more interesting game because he / she can pay attention to which color changes in the success pattern. In addition, in order to further raise expectations for the color change, the movement of the color ball 931 may be temporarily stopped at the stage when it collides with the hold display or at the stage immediately before the collision.

According to the hold change effect described above, there is a period in which the speed of the color ball 931 decelerates after the color ball 931 is released and before it collides with the hold display. Therefore, the player's expectation during that period. You can enhance the feeling. In particular, the player's expectation is significantly improved as compared with the effect of colliding with the hold display at the same speed without decelerating the speed of the color ball 931. Further, since the deceleration period is selectively set from a plurality of deceleration periods, it is possible to provide a variety of effects while paying the player attention to the deceleration period.

Further, in the above embodiment, the colors of the active display and the hold display are changed in the active change effect and the hold display change effect, but the size and shape of the active display and the hold display are changed, and the active display and the hold display are changed. The display may change in various ways. In addition, the colors of active display and hold display such as red, green, blue, and white can be used for both active display and hold display, but there are colors, characters, characters, etc. that are displayed only during active display. There may be colors, characters, characters, etc. that are displayed only when the hold display is on hold.

Further, in the above embodiment, by using the look-ahead effect execution determination table shown in FIG. 18, the execution rate of the look-ahead effect is different between the case of a big hit and the case of a loss, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the reach effect is executed by changing the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect depending on the presence or absence of the reach effect corresponding to the start winning based on the variation pattern corresponding to the variation category command, the reach effect is not executed. The execution rate of the look-ahead effect may be higher than that. Further, based on the fluctuation time indicated by the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation category command, the execution ratio of the look-ahead effect is different, and when the fluctuation time is longer than the predetermined time, the look-ahead effect is executed more than when it is less than the predetermined time. The ratio may be increased.

Further, in the above embodiment, the type of jackpot is determined based on the value of the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, but the conditions for determining the type of jackpot are not limited to this. For example, a specific area may be provided in the vicinity of the large winning opening or inside the large winning opening, and the type of big hit may be determined based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the specific area. .. For example, when a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot are provided, the probabilistic jackpot may be determined based on the entry of the game ball into the specific area.

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot game state is controlled based on the fact that the jackpot symbol is displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, but the jackpot game state is controlled. The mode to be used is not limited to this. For example, a specific area is provided near the second start winning opening or inside the second starting winning opening, and the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the entry (passage) of the game ball into the specific area. You may be in.

In the above embodiment, a mode is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols such as numbers or symbols from 0 to 9 are variably displayed and a display result is derived and displayed, but the variable display is not limited to such a mode. For example, the special symbol to be variably displayed and the special symbol derived and displayed as the variable display result may be different. In other words, a special symbol that is not included in the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols may be derived and displayed as a variable display result, and some of the fluctuating multiple types of special symbols are not specially derived and displayed as a variable display result. May be included. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of special symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of special symbol. As a variable display using one type of special symbol, for example, the one type of special symbol may be blinked (the lighting / extinguishing may be repeated alternately). That is, the repetition of turning on and off may be a variable display. Even in this case, the one type of special symbol may be derived and displayed (lit) at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol may be derived and displayed at the end. It may be. The same applies to the variable display of other symbols (for example, ordinary symbols, decorative symbols, etc.).

For example, in the above, the "ratio" is not limited to the relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, but is such as A: B = 100%: 0%. It is a concept that also includes relationships (that is, a concept that also includes allocations such that one is 100% and the other is 0%). Further, when A is said to have a higher ratio than B, it is a concept including the case where A is 100% and B is less than 100%, and the case where B is 0% and A is larger than 0%. is there.

Further, for example, in the above embodiment, one variation is made when the variation is started in order to notify the effect control board 12 of the variation pattern indicating the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence / absence of pseudo-ream, and the like. Although an example of transmitting a pattern designation command has been shown, the variation pattern may be notified to the effect control board 12 by two or more commands. Specifically, when notifying by two commands, the game control microcomputer 100 uses the first command to indicate whether or not there is a pseudo-ream, whether or not there is a slip effect, etc., before reaching (so-called when not reaching). A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and the second command indicates the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. after the reach (if it does not reach, the so-called first). 2 After the stop, a command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode may be transmitted. In this case, on the effect control board 12 side, the effect control in the variation display may be performed based on the variation time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 100 notifies the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control board 12 selects a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. May be good. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after the first command is sent (for example, the next timer interrupt). In), the second command may be sent. The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to this example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern by two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern designation command.

Further, the game machine of the present invention is not limited to a pay-out type game machine in which a predetermined number of game media are paid out as prizes based on the occurrence of a prize, and a score is scored based on the occurrence of a prize by enclosing the game medium. It can also be applied to the enclosed game machine to be given.

In addition, only one type of off-design symbol (for example, a symbol indicating "-") is displayed during the variable display of the special symbol, and the variable display is performed by repeating the display and extinguishing of the symbol. May be good. Further, even if the symbol is displayed during the variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the symbol indicating "-" may not be displayed as the display result).

Further, in the above embodiment, the main side makes a look-ahead judgment and sends a command corresponding to the judgment result to the sub side, but the main side sends a command indicating a random value and the sub side makes a look-ahead judgment. You may try to do it.

Further, in the above embodiment, the jackpot type is determined at the start of the fluctuation to determine whether or not the gaming state after the jackpot gaming state is set to the "probability change state", but the jackpot is opened at the start of the fluctuation. Only the pattern (aspect of the round game) is determined (it may be specified by the big hit type, etc.), and based on the fact that the game ball passes through a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big winning opening) during the big hit game state. The game state after the big hit game state may be set to the "probability change state".

In addition, for example, a game score for use in a game is given and given by using a frequency that is a game value of a size specified from the recording information of a game recording medium such as a prepaid card or a membership card. The present invention can also be applied to a game machine in which a player plays a game by driving a game ball enclosed in the game machine into a game area by using the game score or the game score given by winning a game.

Further, in the above, an example is used in which a game medium is used as a game machine, but the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and is not limited to a game medium such as a game ball. It can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that encloses and gives a score when the conditions for giving a prize are satisfied.

The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to the form of being distributed and provided by the detachable recording medium to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the computer device and the like in advance. It may take the form of being distributed by pre-installing it in the storage device of the. Further, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from another device on the network connected via the communication line or the like by providing the communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

The execution mode of the game is not limited to the one executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can be executed by temporarily storing the program and data downloaded via the communication line or the like in the internal memory or the like. It may be executed directly using the hardware resources of other devices on the network connected via a communication line or the like. Further, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration is included in the present invention even if there are changes or additions within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other embodiments described later.

Further, all or a part of the above-described embodiments, the configurations shown in the modifications, and the configurations shown in the following embodiments may be arbitrarily combined.

It should be noted that the above-described embodiment and the following-described embodiment disclosed this time are exemplary in all respects and are not considered to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above and below, and is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine that is further provided with display means (for example, an image display device 5) and can be controlled in an advantageous state, and is capable of performing an effect (for example, an effect product). 90201), an movable movable body (for example, push button 90120), and the effect device can be used to perform a specific effect (for example, the specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body. Specific effect executing means (for example, a portion for executing step S908120 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) and a movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion for executing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100). ) And the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the mode of the effect executed by the predetermined effect means, and the effect auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect is displayed by the display means. The movable body control means includes a suggestion effect executing means (for example, an effect control CPU 120 that executes the process of step S804 or step S805) that can be executed, and the movable body control means controls the movable body when the specific effect is executed. The operation is possible (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is executed), the suggestion effect executing means satisfies the specific condition. Examples thereof include a gaming machine in which the effect auxiliary display can be executed at different positions depending on whether or not the display is present (for example, the process of step S805 is executed when it is determined to be Yes in step S803).

According to the above-mentioned game machine, the execution pattern of the production auxiliary display is diversified, and it is possible to prevent the game from being enjoyed. In addition, the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine, the effect auxiliary display may be executed when the movable body is operated. According to such a configuration, the movable body and the specific effect can be noticed, and the effect of the specific effect can be further improved.

Further, the display means and the effect device in the game machine may be the same device (liquid crystal display device or the like). Further, the effect means and the effect device or the movable body in the game machine may be the same device.

Further, in the above-mentioned game machine, the movable body may be made movable when the suggestion effect or the effect auxiliary display is executed. According to such a configuration, it is possible to attract attention by the suggestion effect and the effect auxiliary display, and to further improve the effect.

Further, as an example of a form of a game machine capable of improving the effect of a specific effect, a game machine capable of performing a game and an effect device capable of performing the effect (for example, a production accessory 90201). A movable body (for example, push button 90120) that can be operated, and a specific effect executing means that can execute a specific effect (for example, a specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body by using an effect device. (For example, a portion for executing step S908120 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) and a movable body control means for operating the movable body (for example, a portion for executing step S908111 in the effect control microcomputer 90100) are provided and movable. The body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is executed. ) A game machine can be mentioned. Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of this gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

Other Embodiments 1.
Hereinafter, the first other embodiment will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 901, which is an example of the gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 27 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 901 as viewed from the front.

The pachinko gaming machine 901 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. Further, the pachinko gaming machine 901 has a glass door frame 902 formed in a frame shape provided on the gaming frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical parts and the like are attached, and various parts attached to them (game described later). It is a structure including a board 906).

On the lower surface of the glass door frame 902, there is a ball hitting plate (upper plate) 903. Below the hit ball supply plate 903, a surplus ball receiver 904 for storing game balls that cannot be accommodated in the hit ball supply plate 903 and a hit ball operation handle (operation knob) 905 for firing the hit ball are provided. A game board 906 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 902. The game board 906 is a structure including a plate-shaped body constituting the game board 906 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 906, a game area 907 is formed in which the driven game ball can flow down.

The member forming the surplus ball saucer (lower plate) 904 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side (for example, the central portion of the lower plate) on the upper surface of the lower plate body, and the player A stick controller 90122 that can be gripped and tilted in a plurality of directions (front-back, left-right) is attached. In the stick controller 90122, a player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 90122 with an operating hand (for example, a left hand) and presses and pulls the stick controller 90122 with a predetermined operating finger (for example, the index finger). A trigger button 90121 (see FIG. 31) capable of instructing operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 90125 (FIG. 31) for detecting a predetermined instructing operation such as a push-pull operation on the trigger button 90121 is provided inside the operation rod of the stick controller 90122. 31) is built-in. Further, an inclination direction sensor unit 90123 (see FIG. 31) for detecting an inclination operation with respect to the operation stick is provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 90122. Further, the stick controller 90122 includes a vibrator motor 90126 (see FIGS. 27 and 31) for vibrating the stick controller 90122.

On the member forming the ball striking plate (upper plate) 903, for example, the player presses a predetermined position on the upper surface of the upper plate main body on the front side (for example, above the stick controller 90122) to perform a predetermined instruction operation. A possible push button 90120 is provided. The push button 90120 may be configured to be able to mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from the player. A push sensor 90361 (see FIG. 31) that detects a player's operation action performed on the push button 90120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 90120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 27, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 are in a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the mounting positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may be set to be closer to the left or right on the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 90120 and the stick controller 90122 may not be in a vertical positional relationship, but may be, for example, in a horizontal positional relationship.

An effect display device 909 composed of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided near the center of the game area 907. On the display screen of the effect display device 909, there is an effect symbol display area for variably displaying the effect symbol synchronized with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 909 corresponds to a variable display device that performs variable display of the effect symbol. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area for variably displaying three decorative (effect) effect symbols of "left", "middle", and "right". The symbol display area has "left", "middle", and "right" symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 909, and the symbol display area does not have to be fixed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 909 is controlled by an effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the effect control microcomputer is executing the variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a, the effect display device 909 executes the effect display in accordance with the variable display, and the second special When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display 908b, the effect display is executed on the effect display device 909 along with the variable display, so that it is possible to easily grasp the progress of the game. ..

Further, in the effect display device 909, the symbols other than the symbol that becomes the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol among the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbol (for example, the left middle right symbol is aligned with the same symbol). It is stopped, rocked, scaled or deformed while matching the combination of symbols), or multiple symbols are synchronized and fluctuated with the same symbol, or the positions of the displayed symbols are swapped. The effect performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as a reach effect. In addition, the reach state and its state are referred to as a reach mode. Further, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbol that is variablely displayed on the effect display device 909 is not the jackpot symbol, it becomes "missing" and the variable display state ends. The player plays the game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 909, fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d for displaying the fourth symbol following the effect symbol and the special symbol and the ordinary symbol described later are provided. In another embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol, in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol described later, A fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol is provided, in which the variation display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the second special symbol.

The 4th symbol for the 1st special symbol and the 4th symbol for the 2nd special symbol may be collectively referred to as the 4th symbol, and the 4th symbol display area 909c and the 2nd special for the 1st special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 909d for the symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing a state in which the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d are repeatedly turned on and off at predetermined display colors (for example, blue) at regular time intervals. .. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 909d for the second special symbol are synchronized. "Synchronization" means that the start time and end time of the variable display are the same, and the period of the variable display is the same.

On the right side of the effect display device 909, a first special symbol display (first variable display unit) 908a for variably displaying the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In another embodiment, the first special symbol display 908a is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the first special symbol display 908a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 909 (next to the right of the first special symbol display 908a), a second special symbol display (second variable display unit) 908b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information is displayed. Is also provided. The second special symbol display 908b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display 908b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

The small display is formed in a square shape, for example. Further, in the other embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. Further, the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b may be configured to variably display, for example, a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, respectively.

Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol display 908a and the second special symbol display 908b are collectively referred to as a special symbol display (variable display unit). I have something to do.

In this other embodiment, the case where two special symbol indicators 908a and 908b are provided is shown, but the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol indicator.

In the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first start condition or the second start condition, which is the execution condition of the variable display, is satisfied (for example, the game ball has the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening). After passing through 9014 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of reserved memories is not 0, and the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed). It is started based on the establishment of a state (a state in which the jackpot game is not executed), and when the variable display time (variable time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that the passage of a game ball means that the game ball has passed through a pre-determined area such as a winning opening or a gate, and the concept includes that the game ball has entered (winning) in the winning opening. Is. Further, the derivation display of the display result means that the symbol (example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 909, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 9013 is provided. The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 9013 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 9013a.

Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 9013, a variable winning ball device 9015 having a second starting winning opening 9014 capable of winning a game ball is provided. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 9014 is guided to the back surface of the game board 906 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 9014a. The variable winning ball device 9015 is opened by the solenoid 9016. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened, the game ball can win the second starting winning opening 9014 (it becomes easier to win the starting winning), which is advantageous for the player. When the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state, the game ball is more likely to win the second starting winning opening 9014 than the first starting winning opening 9013. Further, when the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the closed state, the game ball does not win the second starting winning opening 9014. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, the game ball is more likely to win the first starting winning opening 9013 than the second starting winning opening 9014. In the state where the variable winning ball device 9015 is closed, it may be difficult to win a prize, but it may be possible to win a prize (that is, it is difficult for a game ball to win a prize).

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

When the variable winning ball device 9015 is controlled in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 9015 is extremely easy to win in the second starting winning opening 9014. The first start winning opening 9013 is provided directly below the effect display device 909, but the distance between the lower end of the effect display device 909 and the first starting winning opening 9013 may be further narrowed, or the first starting winning opening may be further narrowed. The nails are densely arranged around the 9013, and the nail arrangement around the first start winning opening 9013 makes it difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 9013, so that the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 9014 It may be made higher than the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 9013.

Above the second special symbol display 908b, there is a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b consisting of four indicators that display the number of valid winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the number of second hold storages. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage display 9018b increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display 908b is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, the number of effective winning balls that have entered the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the first holding storage number (holding memory is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning memory. ) Is provided as a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a composed of four displays. The first special symbol hold storage display 9018a increases the number of lit indicators by 1 each time there is a valid start prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display 908a is started, the number of lit indicators is reduced by one.

Further, the display screen of the effect display device 909 is provided with a first hold storage display unit 909a for displaying the first hold storage number and a second hold storage display unit 909b for displaying the second hold storage number. .. In addition, you may be configured to provide the total hold storage display unit which displays the total number (total hold storage number) which is the sum of the 1st hold storage number and the 2nd hold storage number. With such a configuration, it is possible to easily grasp the total number of execution conditions that do not satisfy the variable display start condition.

The effect display device 909 is used for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 908a and during the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 908b. Variable display of the production symbol as the symbol of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 908a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 908b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 909 are synchronized with each other. Further, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 908b, the effect symbol reminiscent of the jackpot on the effect display device 909. The combination of is stopped and displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, a special variable winning ball device 9020 forming a large winning opening is provided on the right side of the variable winning ball device 9015. The special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided with an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 908a and the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 908b. In the specific gaming state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when is derived and displayed, the opening / closing plate is controlled to the open state by the solenoid 9021, so that the big winning opening, which is the winning area, is opened. The game ball that has won the big prize opening is detected by the count switch 9023.

In another embodiment, since the special variable winning ball device 9020 is provided on the right side of the game area 907, the player can put the game ball on the special variable winning ball device 9020 in the big hit game state. In order to win a prize, a firing operation (so-called right-handed) is performed aiming at the right side of the game area 907. Even if the gate 9032 and the variable winning ball device 9015 are provided on the right side of the game area 907, the right-handed operation can be performed even when the game state is a time saving state or a high base state. Good.

Further, as shown in FIG. 27, a directing accessory 90201 that imitates the face of a character or the like is provided below the variable winning ball device 9015. An accessory LED 90202 is provided in a portion of the effect accessory 90201 that imitates the eyes of a character or the like, and a predetermined effect can be performed by lighting and displaying the accessory LED 90202 of the effect accessory 90201. Has been done. Further, in another embodiment, the accessory LED 90202 is composed of a full-color LED, and can emit light in various lighting colors such as white and red, and emits light by changing the lighting color in order. It is also possible to emit light by rainbow color display (rainbow display).

On the left side of the effect display device 909, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol is provided. In another embodiment, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9. Further, the small display is formed in a square shape, for example. The ordinary symbol display 9010 may be configured to variably display a number (or a two-digit symbol) from 00 to 99, for example. Further, the ordinary symbol display 9010 is not limited to a 7-segment LED or the like, for example, a display capable of lighting and displaying a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp capable of alternately lighting and displaying "○" and "×"). It may be composed of.

When the game ball passes through the gate 9032 and is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started. Then, when the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 9015 is a state in which the player is advantageous from a disadvantageous state to an advantageous state when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning opening 9014). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 9010, a normal symbol hold storage display 9041 having a display unit with four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 9032 is provided. Every time the game ball passes through the gate 9032, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 9032a, the normal symbol hold storage display 9041 increases the number of lit LEDs by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 9010 is started, the number of lit LEDs is reduced by one. Furthermore, the probability variation state is a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit is higher than that in the normal state (a state in which the probability of being determined to be a big hit as a result of changing the special symbol is increased as compared with the normal state). Then, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased. Further, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased even in the time saving state (the game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) in which the fluctuation time of the symbol is shortened although it is not the probabilistic state.

At the bottom of the game board 906, there is an out port 9026 in which a hit ball that has not won a prize is taken in. Further, four speakers 9027 for producing sound effects and sounds as predetermined sound outputs are provided on the upper left and right upper parts and the lower left and right lower parts outside the game area 907. A frame LED 9028 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 907.

The game machine is a ball launching device (not shown) that drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball striking handle 905 and launches the game ball into the game area 907 using the rotational force of the drive motor (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball launched from the hit ball launcher enters the game area 907 through a hit ball rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 907, and then descends from the game area 907. When the game ball enters the first start winning opening 9013 and is detected by the first start opening switch 9013a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the first (1), the first special symbol display 908a starts the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 9013. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

When the game ball enters the second start winning opening 9014 and is detected by the second start opening switch 9014a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends and the second special symbol is displayed. 2), the second special symbol display 908b starts the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol, and the effect display device 909 starts the variable display of the effect symbol. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second starting winning opening 9014. Unless the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is incremented by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In another embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot is obtained, the game state is shifted to the high probability state (probability variation state), and the game ball is easily started and won a prize (that is, the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b). And the effect display device 909 shifts to a high base state (shifts to a time saving state in another embodiment), which is a game state controlled so as to easily satisfy the execution condition of the variable display). Also, when the gaming state is changed to the time saving state, it is also changed to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is increased, or the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened is extended as compared with the case where the high base state is not achieved. It becomes easier to win a start prize.

It should be noted that, instead of extending the time during which the variable winning ball device 9015 is in the open state (also referred to as an open extension state), the state shifts to a normal symbol probability change state in which the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased. By doing so, it may shift to a high base state. When the stop symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability change state, the probability that the stopped symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 becomes a hit symbol is increased, and the frequency with which the variable winning ball device 9015 is opened increases. Therefore, if the normal symbol probability change state is entered, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased, and the starting winning is easy (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 9015 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is the hit symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is the probabilistic symbol, which is disadvantageous to the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state where it is easy to win a start). It should be noted that increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

Further, the normal symbol display 9010 may shift to the high base state by shifting to the normal symbol time reduction state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol is shortened. In the normal symbol time reduction state, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, so that the frequency of starting the fluctuation of the normal symbol increases, and as a result, the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases. Therefore, as the frequency of hitting the normal symbol increases, the frequency of opening the variable winning ball device 9015 increases, and the starting prize is easily won (high base state).

In addition, by shifting to a time-saving state in which the fluctuation time (variable display period) of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, the fluctuation time of the special symbol or the effect symbol is shortened, so that the fluctuation of the special symbol or the effect symbol starts. It can be done more frequently (in other words, the reserved memory is digested faster), and the situation where an invalid start prize is generated can be reduced. Therefore, a valid start prize is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of a big hit game is increased.

Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a starting prize (shift to a high base state). You may. In addition, by shifting to any one or more of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high base). It may be changed to the state). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability change state, normal symbol time reduction state, and special symbol time reduction state), it becomes easier to win a start prize (high). It may move to the base state).

Next, the internal structure of the push button 90120 will be described. 28 and 29 are exploded perspective views for explaining the internal structure of the push button 90120. As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, a holding member 90302 for holding the vibrated member 90303 is provided inside the transparent cover 90301 of the push button 90120. In another embodiment, one holding member 90302 holds all the vibrated members 90303. A plurality (13) of arrangement holes 90325 for arranging each vibrated member 90303 are passed through the holding member 90302. Further, the vibrated member 90303 and the arrangement hole 90325 have a one-to-one correspondence, and the shape of the arrangement hole 90325 has a regular hexagonal shape in a plan view corresponding to the shape of the vibrated member 90303. Further, the vibrated member 90303 is inserted into the arrangement hole 90325 from below. On the outer peripheral surface of the lower end portion of the vibrated member 90303, a protruding edge portion (not shown) is provided so as to prevent the vibrating member 90303 from coming off from the arrangement hole 90325. Since the protruding edge portion is projected, the diameter dimension of the lower end portion of the vibrated member 90303 is larger than the opening dimension of the arrangement hole 90325.

Further, in the vicinity of the arrangement hole 90325 in the holding member 90302, the vibrated member 90303 is formed in the same shape as the vibrated member 90303 and has a regular hexagonal shape in a plan view, and it is visually recognized that the vibrated member 90303 is vibrating. An auxiliary visual recognition unit 90326 is formed to facilitate the process. The auxiliary visual recognition unit 90326 is a portion integrally formed with the holding member 90302, and is provided at a plurality of positions of the holding member 90302, particularly around the arrangement hole 90325. It should be noted that not all the auxiliary visual recognition parts 90326 need to have the same shape as the vibrated member 90303, and the auxiliary visual recognition part 90326 formed at the corner of the holding member 90302 has a shape in which a part thereof is cut out, that is, one. The portion has the same shape as a part of the vibrated member 90303 (a shape in which a part of a regular hexagon is cut out).

Further, in another embodiment, the stick controller 90122 can be vibrated by driving the vibrator motor 90126 provided in the stick controller 90122, and the push is integrally configured with the stick controller 90122. The button 90120 can also be vibrated, whereby the vibrated member 90303 can also be vibrated. When the push button 90120 is vibrating, the vibrated member 90303 vibrates with a large amplitude, but the auxiliary visual recognition unit 90326 integrated with the holding member 90302 vibrates with a smaller amplitude than the vibrated member 90303. The vibration of the vibrated member 90303 is emphasized and visually recognized due to the difference in (amplitude).

In FIGS. 28 and 29, the vibrated member 90303 is shown as halftone dots to aid understanding, but the color of the vibrated member 90303 and the color of the auxiliary visual recognition unit 90326 are the same. .. That is, in a state where the vibrated member 90303 is not vibrating, it is difficult to distinguish between the vibrated member 90303 and the auxiliary visual recognition unit 90326, and it is difficult to know which part vibrates. .. Therefore, when the vibrated member 90303 begins to vibrate, unexpectedness occurs and the game entertainment is improved.

Further, below the vibrated member 90303, a vibrating lens member 90304 for transmitting vibration to each vibrated member 90303 is provided. In another embodiment, one plate-shaped vibrating lens member 90304 is provided, and the vibration applied to the vibrating lens member 90304 is transmitted to each vibrated member 90303. The inside of the vibrated member 90303 is hollow, and a swing shaft projecting downward is provided at the center thereof. On the upper surface side of the vibrating lens member 90304, a plurality of bottomed holes 90335 in which the lower ends of the swing shafts of the vibrating member 90303 are arranged are provided. Further, the vibrated member 90303 is provided so as to be swingable around the lower end of the swing shaft.

Further, among the plurality of bottomed hole portions 90335 formed in the vibrating lens member 90304, some of the bottomed hole portions 90335 are formed in the convex portion 90336 projecting upward from the vibrating lens member 90304. , Each convex portion 90336 is formed so that the protruding length is different. That is, when the height position of the bottom surface of each bottomed hole 90335 is different and the vibrated member 90303 is swung around the lower end of the swinging shaft that contacts the bottom surface of the bottomed hole 90335. In addition, there is a difference in the vibration mode of each vibrated member 90303 (swinging randomly). In another embodiment, in the vibrating lens member 90304, the height position of the bottomed hole 90335 provided on the central side of the push button 90120 is high, and the bottomed hole provided on the peripheral side of the push button 90120. The height position of the portion 90335 is low. The height position of each vibrated member 90303 is different according to the difference in the height position of the bottomed hole portion 90335.

As shown in FIG. 28, a plate-shaped button base member 90305 is provided below the vibrating lens member 90304. The holding member 90302 holding the vibrated member 90303 is connected to the button base member 90305 with the vibrating lens member 90304 housed therein. The vibrating lens member 90304 is placed on the upper surface side of the button base member 90305, and the vibrating lens member 90304 is oscillated with respect to the button base member 90305. Further, on the peripheral edge of the button base member 90305, an engaged portion 90343 with which the engaging convex portion 90327 provided on the peripheral edge of the holding member 90302 is engaged is provided. Further, the transparent cover 90301 is connected to the button base member 90305 from above. On the peripheral edge of the button base member 90305, an engaging convex portion 90345 that is engaged with the engaged concave portion 90323 provided on the peripheral edge of the transparent cover 90301 is provided.

In another embodiment, the holding member 90302, the vibrated member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 are made of a translucent material, and as will be described later, the effect is applied from below. The light of the button LED 90360 can be transmitted. The vibrating member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 do not have to be completely transparent, and may be an opaque member such as frosted glass as long as they are at least translucent. It may be a colored member.

The transparent cover 90301 described above is configured as a completely transparent member, but is not limited to this, as long as the vibration mode of the vibrated member 90303 is visible (recognizable). The transparent cover 90301 may be an opaque member such as frosted glass or a colored member.

As shown in FIG. 29, a plate-shaped base member 90306 is provided below the button base member 90305. At the center of the base member 90306, a coil spring 90355 is provided as an urging means for urging the button base member 90305 to one side (upward). One end of the coil spring 90355 is arranged in a spring arrangement portion 90354 formed in the central portion of the upper surface of the base member 90306, and the other end of the coil spring 90355 is a spring formed in the central portion of the lower surface of the button base member 90305. It is mounted on the mounting protrusion. The coil spring 90355 has an urging force in the extending direction, and the coil spring 90355 imparts an urging force to the button base member 90305 so as to be moved upward.

Further, in the vicinity of the peripheral edge on the lower surface side of the button base member 90305, an engaging claw 90344 inserted into the mounting hole 90353 of the base member 90306 is projected downward. By loosely fitting the engaging claw 90344 into the mounting hole 90353, the button base member 90305 is attached to the base member 90306 in a state where it can move in the vertical direction with respect to the base member 90306. Further, the lower end portion of the engaging claw 90344 has a hook shape so that the engaging claw 90344 does not come out upward from the mounting hole 90353. That is, even if the button base member 90305 rises due to the urging force of the coil spring 90355, the moving range is regulated by the engaging claw 90344.

Further, on the outer peripheral edge of the transparent cover 90301, a ridge 90321 formed so as to surround the outer peripheral edge and projecting in the horizontal direction is provided. Further, a convex piece 90322 is provided at the front end portion of the transparent cover 90301. The ridge 90321 of the transparent cover 90301 is hooked on the hooked strip provided on the inner peripheral edge of the button arranging portion 90308, and the convex piece 90322 of the transparent cover 90301 is provided on the front end of the button arranging portion 90308. By being hooked on the hooked portion, even if the button base member 90305 rises, its movement range is restricted.

In another embodiment, when the player presses the push button 90120, the transparent cover 90301, the holding member 90302, the vibrated member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 are integrated. , It is moved downward against the urging force of the coil spring 90355. In another embodiment, the transparent cover 90301, the holding member 90302, the vibrated member 90303, the vibrating lens member 90304, and the button base member 90305 form a moving portion that is movably supported by the base member 90306. ..

Further, the push button 90120 is arranged in the empty arrangement space 90370 of the button arrangement portion 90308. A screw fixing hole 90312 through which a screw for fixing the base member 90306 is inserted is provided in the upper part of the operation stick 90309 (the base portion of the button arrangement portion 90308). The screw fixing holes 90312 are provided at two locations on the left and right. Further, female screw portions 90356 are provided at two positions on the left and right in the vicinity of one end of the base member 90306 (in the other embodiment, in the vicinity of the front end). The base member 90306 is fixed to the operating rod 90309 by screwing the screw inserted into the screw fixing hole 90312 into the female screw portion 90356. Then, when the vibrator motor 90126 is driven and the operation rod 90309 is vibrated, the vibration is transmitted to the base member 90306 via the screw inserted into the screw fixing hole 90312, and is provided above the base member 90306. The push button 90120 (moving part) will vibrate.

As shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, a button substrate 90307 is provided below the base member 90306. A button LED 90360 for directing is mounted on the button substrate 90307. A plurality of the button LEDs 90360 are provided on the button substrate 90307 (7 in the other embodiment), and the base member 90306 is a window portion in which the button LEDs 90360 are arranged at positions corresponding to the button LEDs 90360. 90351 is open. Then, when the button LED 90360 is turned on, light is incident from the lower surface of the button base member 90305, and the light refracted and diffused by the light diffusing portion of the vibrating lens member 90304 is transferred to the holding member 90302 and the vibrated member 90303. It is incident from below. Therefore, when the push button 90120 is viewed from the player's point of view, the holding member 90302 and the vibrated member 90303 appear to be emitting light.

Further, the button substrate 90307 is equipped with a push sensor 90361 (photosensor) for detecting whether or not a pressing operation performed on the push button 90120 has been performed. Further, the base member 90306 is opened with a window portion 90352 in which the push sensor 90361 is arranged at a position corresponding to the push sensor 90361. The push sensor 90361 is exposed on the upper surface side of the base member 90306 through the window portion 90352.

FIG. 30 is a block diagram showing an example of a circuit configuration on the main board (game control board) 9031. Note that FIG. 30 also shows a payout control board 9037, an effect control board 9080, and the like. A game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 90560 that controls a pachinko game machine 901 according to a program is mounted on the main board 9031. The game control microcomputer 90560 includes a ROM 9054 that stores a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 9055 as a storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 9056 that performs control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 9057. including. In another embodiment, the ROM 9054 and the RAM 9055 are built into the game control microcomputer 90560. That is, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer may have at least a CPU 9056 and a RAM 9055 built-in, and the ROM 9054 may be externally attached or built-in. Further, the I / O port portion 9057 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 90560 also includes a random number circuit 90503 that generates a hardware random number (a random number generated by the hardware circuit).

Further, the RAM 9055 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means in which a part or all thereof is backed up by a backup power source created on the power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the game machine is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 9055 are stored for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied with power). To. In particular, at least the data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, etc.) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of the power failure or the like based on the data when the data is restored after the power failure or the like occurs. Further, the data corresponding to the control state and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as the data indicating the progress state of the game. In the other embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 9055 is backed up by the power supply.

Since the CPU 9056 of the game control microcomputer 90560 executes control according to the program stored in the ROM 9054, the game control microcomputer 90560 (or CPU 9056) executes (or performs processing) below. Specifically, the CPU 9056 executes control according to a program. This also applies to microcomputers mounted on substrates other than the main substrate 9031.

The random number circuit 90503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination for determining whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 90503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start is generated at a random timing. It has a random number generation function in which the read numerical data becomes a random number value based on the time when the winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data.

Further, an input driver circuit 9058 that gives detection signals from the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 to the game control microcomputer 90560 is also mounted on the main board 9031. The main board also includes an output circuit 9059 that drives a solenoid 9016 that opens and closes the variable winning ball device 9015 and a solenoid 9021 that opens and closes the special variable winning ball device 9020 that forms a large winning opening according to a command from the game control microcomputer 90560. It is mounted on the 9031.

Further, the game control microcomputer 90560 includes a first special symbol display 908a for variably displaying a special symbol, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010 for variably displaying a normal symbol, and a first special symbol hold storage. The display control of the display 9018a, the second special symbol holding storage display 9018b, and the normal symbol holding storage display 9041 is performed.

An information output circuit 9064 that outputs an information output signal such as jackpot information indicating the occurrence of a jackpot gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer via the terminal board 90160 is also mounted on the main board 9031.

In another embodiment, the effect control means (consisting of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 9080 transmits the effect content from the game control microcomputer 90560 via the relay board 9077. It receives the effect control command to instruct and controls the display of the effect display device 909 that variably displays the effect symbol.

Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080 is the frame LED 9028 provided on the frame side, the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201, and the push button via the lamp driver board 9035. The display of the button LED 90360 provided on the 90120 is controlled, and the sound output from the speaker 9027 is controlled via the audio output board 9070.

As will be described later, the effect control means is also connected to the trigger sensor 90125 included in the stick controller 90122, the tilt direction sensor unit 90123, the vibrator motor 90126, and the push sensor 90361 provided in the push button 90120. (See FIG. 31), but the illustration is omitted in FIG.

FIG. 31 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 9077, the effect control board 9080, the lamp driver board 9035, and the audio output board 9070. In the example shown in FIG. 31, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, the lamp driver board 9035 and the audio output board 9070 may not be provided, and only the effect control board 9080 may be provided for the effect control.

The effect control board 9080 is equipped with an effect control CPU 90101 and an effect control microcomputer 90100 including a RAM for storing information related to the effect such as an effect symbol process flag. The RAM may be externally attached. In another embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 90100 is not backed up. In the effect control board 9080, the effect control CPU 90101 operates according to a program stored in an internal or external ROM (not shown), and a capture signal (capture signal) from the main board 9031 input via the relay board 9077. The effect control command is received via the input driver 90102 and the input port 90103 in response to the effect control INT signal). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 90109 to control the display of the effect display device 909 based on the effect control command.

In another embodiment, the VDP 90109 that controls the display of the effect display device 909 in cooperation with the effect control microcomputer 90100 is mounted on the effect control board 9080. The VDP 90109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 90100, and VRAM is mapped there. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 90109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 909 via the frame memory.

The effect control CPU 90101 outputs a command for reading necessary data from the CGROM (not shown) to the VDP 90109 according to the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 909, specifically, people, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for. The VDP90109 reads image data from the CGROM in response to a command from the effect control CPU 90101. Then, the VDP 90109 executes display control based on the read image data.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 90102 on the effect control board 9080. The input driver 90102 allows the signal input from the relay board 9077 to pass only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the inside of the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulatory means.

As a signal direction regulating means, the relay board 9077 allows the signal input from the main board 9031 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control board 9080 (the signal does not pass in the direction from the effect control board 9080 to the relay board 9077). The unidirectional circuit 9074 of the above is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. FIG. 31 illustrates a diode. Further, a unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 9031 via the output port 90571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 9077 to the inside of the main board 9031 is regulated. That is, the signal from the relay board 9077 does not enter the inside of the main board 9031 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 90560). The output port 90571 is a part of the I / O port portion 9057 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided on the outside of the output port 90571 (on the relay board 9077 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the trigger button 90121 of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the trigger sensor 90125 via the input port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the push button 90120 has been detected from the push sensor 90361 via the input port 90106. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 inputs an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action on the operation stick of the stick controller 90122 has been detected from the tilt direction sensor unit 90123 via the input port 90106. .. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 vibrates the stick controller 90122 by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 90126 via the output port 90105.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 9035 via the output port 90105. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 outputs sound number data to the audio output board 9070 via the output port 90104.

In the lamp driver board 9035, the signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 90352 via the input driver 90351. The LED driver 90352 supplies a current to light emitters such as the frame LED 9028, the accessory LED 90202, and the button LED 90360 based on the signal for driving the LED.

In the voice output board 9070, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 90703 via the input driver 90702. The voice synthesis IC 90703 generates voices and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit 90705. The amplifier circuit 90705 outputs a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 90703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 90706 to the speaker 9027. The voice data ROM 90704 stores control data according to the sound number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data showing the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, the variation period of the effect symbol) in chronological order.

Next, the operation of the game machine will be described. FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 on the main board 9031. When the power is turned on to the game machine and the power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) After executing the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S901 is started. In the main process, the CPU 9056 first makes necessary initial settings.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 9056 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S901). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S902), and the stack pointer designated address is set in the stack pointer (step S903). Then, after initializing the built-in device (initializing the built-in device (built-in peripheral circuit) CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), etc.) (step S904), the RAM can be accessed. (Step S905). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 9056 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This mode indicates the interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input via the input port (step S906). When the ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 9056 executes a normal initialization process (steps S901 to S9015).

If the clear switch is not on, check whether data protection processing in the backup RAM area (for example, processing when power supply is stopped such as adding parity data) was performed when power supply to the game machine was stopped. (Step S907). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 9056 executes the initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing.

After confirming that the power supply stop processing has been performed, the CPU 9056 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S908). In other embodiments, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S908, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same processing in the power supply stop processing. If the data is restored after the power supply is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply is stopped, the initialization process executed when the power is turned on, which is not the time when the power supply is stopped, is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 9056 performs game state recovery processing (steps S9041 to S9043) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing) is performed. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9041), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (area in the RAM 9055) (step S9042). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S9041 and S9042, the saved contents remain as they are for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability change flag, time saving flag, etc.), and the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer). ), The part where the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S9043). Further, the CPU 9056 transmits a display result designation command specifying a display result (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, small hit, or loss) stored in the backup RAM to the effect control board 9080 (step). S9044). Then, the process proceeds to step S9014. In step S9044, the CPU 9056 also transmits a first symbol variation designation command and a second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 36), for example, when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM. You may try to do it. In this case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may restart the variation display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command.

In the other embodiment, the value of the variable time timer described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result specification command is transmitted in step S9044, the measurement of the value of the saved fluctuation time timer is restarted, the fluctuation display of the special symbol is restarted, and the data is saved. When the value of the fluctuation time timer that has been set timed out, the symbol confirmation specification command described later is transmitted. Further, in the other embodiment, the value of the special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process processing is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the saved special symbol process flag.

Instead of always transmitting the display result specification command when the power is restored, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0. .. Then, if the value of the fluctuation time timer is not 0, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the fluctuation time timer is 0, the fluctuation time occurs during the power failure. It may be determined that the state is not present and the display result specification command may not be sent.

Further, the CPU 9056 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that a power failure occurs during the fluctuation, and a display result specification command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, the fluctuation occurs during a power failure. It may be determined that it was not inside and the display result specification command may not be sent.

In the other embodiment, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the backup RAM area is saved by using both the backup flag and the check data, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as an opportunity to execute the game state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 9056 first performs a RAM clear process (step S9010). By the RAM clear processing, predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) is initialized to 0, but is an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. It may be initialized to. Further, the entire area of the RAM 9055 may not be initialized, and predetermined data (for example, data of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is. Further, the start address of the initialization table set in the ROM 9054 is set in the pointer (step S9011), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S9012).

By the processing of steps S9011 and S9012, for example, a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and other flags for selectively processing according to the control state are initially set. The value is set.

Further, the CPU 9056 is an initialization designation command for initializing a sub-board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 9031 is mounted) (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 90560 has executed the initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S9013). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 909 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the game machine has been initialized, that is, an initialization notification.

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 90503 (step S9014). The CPU 9056 sets the random number circuit 90503 to update the value of the random number R'by, for example, executing the process according to the random number circuit setting program.

Then, in step S9015, the CPU 9056 sets the CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 90560 so that the timer interrupt is periodically applied at predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, as an initial value, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register). In another embodiment, it is assumed that the timer is interrupted periodically every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S901 to S9015) is completed, the CPU 9056 repeatedly executes the display random number update process (step S9017) and the initial value random number update process (step S9018) in the main process. When executing the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S9016), and when the execution of the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set. Set (step S9019). In other embodiments, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when it is not a big hit, or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when it is not a big hit. , The display random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. In another embodiment, the initial value random number is the initial count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining whether or not to hit the normal symbol (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining the value. Game control processing that controls the progress of the game, which will be described later (the game control microcomputer 90560 controls the game devices such as the effect display device, the variable winning ball device, and the ball payout device provided in the game machine. In the process of performing, or the process of transmitting a command signal to be controlled by another microcomputer, also called the game device control process), the count value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination is one round (taking the random number for normal symbol hit judgment). The initial value is set in the counter when the step is taken by the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible value.

When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 9056 executes the timer interrupt processing of steps S9020 to S9034 shown in FIG. 33. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power failure detection process for detecting whether or not a power failure signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) is executed (step S9020). The power off signal is output when, for example, the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a drop in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the game machine. Then, in the power supply cutoff detection process, when the CPU 9056 detects that the power supply cutoff signal has been output, the CPU 9056 executes a power supply stop time process for saving the necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 9032a, the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 are input via the input driver circuit 9058, and their states are determined (switch processing: step S9021). ).

Next, the CPU 9056 includes a first special symbol display 908a, a second special symbol display 908b, a normal symbol display 9010, a first special symbol hold storage display 9018a, a second special symbol hold storage display 9018b, and a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the hold storage display 9041 is executed (step S9022). For the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the normal symbol display 9010, a drive signal is output to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S9032 and S9033. Take control.

In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol hit determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S9023). The CPU 9056 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number update process, display random number update process: steps S9024, S9025).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol process process (step S9026). In the special symbol process process, the corresponding process is executed according to the special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 908a, the second special symbol display 908b, and the grand prize opening in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the game state.

Next, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S9027). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 9056 executes the corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display 9010 in a predetermined order. The CPU 9056 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the game state.

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a process of sending an effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (effect control command control process: step S9028).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs an information output process for outputting data such as jackpot information, start information, and probability fluctuation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S9029).

Further, the CPU 9056 executes a prize ball process for setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 (step S9030). Specifically, the payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 9037 responds to the winning detection based on any of the first start port switch 9013a, the second start port switch 9014a, and the count switch 9023 being turned on. A payout control command (prize ball number signal) indicating the number of prize balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 9097 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

In another embodiment, for example, a game ball wins a prize in the first start winning opening 9013 or the second starting winning opening 9014, and a detection signal from the first starting opening switch 9013a or the second starting opening switch 9014a is transmitted. If entered, three prize balls shall be paid out. Further, for example, when a game ball wins a prize in the large prize opening and a detection signal from the count switch 9023 is input, 15 prize balls are paid out.

In another embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 9056 turns on / on the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The contents related to off are output to the output port (step S9031: output processing).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for displaying the effect of the special symbol according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S9032).

Further, the CPU 9056 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting the normal symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the normal symbol according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the normal symbol display control data (the normal symbol display control process). Step S9033). For example, when the start flag related to the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the CPU 9056 switches the display state (“○” and “×”) of the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol every 0.2 seconds until the end flag is set. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating "○" and 0 indicating "x") is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 9056 executes the effect display of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 9010 by outputting the drive signal in step S9022 according to the display control data set in the output buffer.

After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process ends.

With the above control, in the other embodiment, the game control process is started every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S9021 to S9033 (excluding step S9029) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in the other embodiment, the game control process is executed by the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is performed. It may be executed in the main process.

FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1'(MR1'): Determine the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) (for determining the jackpot type).
(2) Random 2'(MR2'): Determine the type (type) of the fluctuation pattern (for determining the fluctuation pattern type)
(3) Random 3'(MR3'): Determine the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time) (for determining the fluctuation pattern)
(4) Random 4'(MR4'): Determines whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination).
(5) Random 5'(MR5'): Determine the initial value of random 4'(for determining the initial value of random 4')

In step S9023 in the game control process shown in FIG. 33, the game control microcomputer 90560 is a counter for generating the big hit type determination random number (1) and the ordinary symbol hit determination random number (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are random numbers for determination, and random numbers other than these are random numbers for display (random 2', random 3') or random numbers for initial value (random 5'). In addition, random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used in order to enhance the game effect. Further, in another embodiment, as the jackpot determination random number, a random number generated by the hardware built in the game control microcomputer 90560 (may be external hardware of the game control microcomputer 90560) is used. .. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of the hardware random number.

FIG. 35A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The jackpot determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The jackpot determination table includes a normal jackpot determination table used in a normal state and a time saving state (that is, a gaming state that is not a probability variation state) and a probability variation jackpot determination table used in the probability variation state. Each numerical value shown in the left column of FIG. 35 (A) is set in the normal big hit judgment table, and each numerical value shown in the right column of FIG. Is set. The numerical value shown in FIG. 35 (A) is the jackpot determination value.

35 (B) and 35 (C) are explanatory views showing a small hit determination table. The small hit determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 9054, and is a table in which a small hit determination value to be compared with the random R'is set. The small hit determination table includes a small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when displaying the variation of the first special symbol and a small hit determination table used when displaying the variation of the second special symbol. (For the second special design) Each numerical value shown in FIG. 35 (B) is set in the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol), and in FIG. 35 (C) in the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol). Each numerical value described is set. Further, the numerical values shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and 35 (C) are small hit determination values.

The CPU 9056 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 90503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random R'). The big hit determination random number value is shown in FIG. 35 (A). If any of the indicated jackpot determination values is matched, it is determined to make a jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation jackpot, sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the random value for big hit determination matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and 35 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is a small hit. The "probability" shown in FIG. 35 (A) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. Further, the "probability" shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and 35 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Further, determining whether or not to make a big hit means determining whether or not to shift to the big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b is determined. It also means deciding whether or not to make a big hit design. Further, determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to shift to the small hit game state, but stop at the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b. It also means deciding whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

In the other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and 35 (C), when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is performed at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in the other embodiment, when the first start winning opening 9013 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 9014 is entered and the second special Compared to the case where the variable display of the symbol is executed, the ratio of determining "small hit" is high.

35 (D) and 35 (E) are explanatory views showing the jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b stored in the ROM 9054. Of these, FIG. 35 (D) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the first start winning opening 9013 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). The jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 90131a of the case. Further, FIG. 35 (E) shows a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the hold memory based on the game ball winning the second start winning opening 9014 (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 90131b.

The jackpot type determination tables 90131a and 90131b set the jackpot type to "normal jackpot" based on a random number (random 1') for determining the jackpot type when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot symbol. It is a table referred to for determining either "probability change jackpot" or "sudden change jackpot". In the other embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 35 (D) and 35 (E), the jackpot type determination table 90131a is assigned five determination values for the “sudden probability variation jackpot” ( While it is determined to be a sudden probability change jackpot at a rate of 5/40), one judgment value is assigned to the "sudden probability change jackpot" in the jackpot type determination table 90131b (1/40). (Suddenly determined to be a probabilistic jackpot at the rate of)) will be described. Therefore, in the other embodiment, when the first start winning opening 9013 is entered and the variation display of the first special symbol is executed, the second starting winning opening 9014 is entered and the second special Compared to the case where the variable display of the symbol is executed, the rate of being determined as "sudden probability change jackpot" is high. The "sudden probability change jackpot" is distributed only to the jackpot type determination table 90131a for the first special symbol, and the "sudden probability variation jackpot" is not distributed to the jackpot type determination table 90131b for the second special symbol (that is, , "Sudden probability change jackpot" may be determined only when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed).

In other embodiments, as shown in FIGS. 35 (D) and 35 (E), the jackpot types include "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot". In this other embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is two types, 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the jackpot game is the other implementation. It is not limited to the one shown in the form of. For example, a 10R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 10-round jackpot game, a 7R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 7-round jackpot game, and a 5R probability variable jackpot controlled for a 5-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in other embodiments, the case where the big hit types are three types of "normal big hit", "probability change big hit" and "sudden change big hit" is shown, but the case is not limited to three types, for example, four types. The above jackpot types may be provided. On the contrary, the number of jackpot types may be less than three, and for example, only two types may be provided as jackpot types.

The “normal jackpot” is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifts to only a time saving state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (see step S90167 described later). Then, after shifting to the time saving state, when the variation display is completed a predetermined number of times (100 times in other embodiments), the time saving state ends (see steps S90168 and S90137 to S90140). Even before the end of the fluctuation display a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is ended even when the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

The "probability change jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to the jackpot gaming state of 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the end of the jackpot gaming state (in other embodiments, the probability variation state is shifted and the time is shortened. (See steps S90169 and S90170 described later). Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

In addition, the "sudden change jackpot" is the number of times the big prize opening is opened less than the "normal jackpot" and the "probability change jackpot" (in other embodiments, the opening for 0.1 second is twice). It is a big hit that is allowed up to. That is, in the case of "sudden probability change big hit", it is controlled to the big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal jackpot" and "probability jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot per round is as long as 29 seconds, while in "sudden jackpot", the opening time of the jackpot per round is long. It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it can hardly be expected that a game ball will win a prize at the big prize opening during a big hit game. Then, in the other embodiment, after the sudden end of the probabilistic jackpot gaming state, the probabilistic state is shifted (in the other embodiment, the probabilistic state is shifted and the time is shortened as well. Steps S90169 and S90170). Then, the probabilistic state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S90132).

The mode of the sudden change jackpot is not limited to that shown in the other embodiments. For example, the number of times the big winning opening is opened may be 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as a normal big hit or a sudden change big hit, and only the opening time of the big winning opening may be extremely short, 0.1 seconds.

In the other embodiment, even when a "small hit" is obtained, the big winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as in the big hit game state by the "sudden probability change big hit" is performed. Is done. Then, in the case of a "small hit", the gaming state does not change after the two opening of the large winning opening is completed, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden change big hit" or a "small hit", and the interest of the game is improved. If all the big hit types are configured to be probabilistic big hits, it is not necessary to provide small hits. In addition, when a small hit is provided when all the jackpot types are probability variable jackpots, the sudden probability variable jackpot is only shifted to the probability variation state (high probability state) and is not accompanied by the time saving state (high base state). It is preferable to provide the above (the opening pattern of the big winning opening is also the same for the sudden change big hit and the small hit).

The jackpot type judgment tables 90131a and 90131b are numerical values to be compared with the values of random 1', and are judgment values corresponding to "normal jackpot", "probability change jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot" (big hit type determination Value) is set. When the value of random 1'matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type to the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

36 and 37 are explanatory views showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560. In the example shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, the command 80XX (H) is an effect control command (variation pattern command) that specifies a variation pattern of the effect symbol that is variably displayed on the effect display device 909 in response to the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponds to the fluctuation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is assigned to each of the fluctuation patterns that can be used, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" indicates that it is a hexadecimal number. The effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for designating the fluctuation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 909 controls to start the variable display of the effect symbol.

The commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether or not to make a big hit, whether or not to make a small hit, and the type of big hit. Since the effect control microcomputer 90100 determines the display result of the effect symbol in response to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

The command 8D01 (H) is an effect control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. The command 8D02 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol specification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variation pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

The command 8F00 (H) is an effect control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 90100 receives the symbol confirmation designation command, the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is terminated and the display result is derived and displayed.

The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is started. The command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when the power supply to the game machine is restarted. When the power supply to the game machine is started, the game control microcomputer 90560 sends a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and initializes the game machine otherwise. Send a command.

The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demo designation command) for designating a customer waiting demonstration.

The commands A001 and A002 (H) are effect control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the jackpot game. In other embodiments, a jackpot start designation command or a small hit / sudden probability variation jackpot start designation command is used, depending on the type of jackpot. Specifically, the big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability big hit", and the small hit in the case of "sudden change big hit" or "small hit". / Sudden change big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. The game control microcomputer 90560 may be configured to send a fanfare designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot start designation when it is a sudden big hit, but not to send a fanfare designation command when it is a small hit. Good.

The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (command for designating the opening of the winning opening) indicating the display during the opening of the winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX. Further, A2XX (H) is an effect control command (a command designated after opening the large winning opening) indicating the closing of the large winning opening for the number of times (round) indicated by XX.

The command A301 (H) is an effect control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the jackpot end screen, that is, designating the end of the jackpot game. The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when ending the jackpot game by "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot". The command A302 (H) is an effect control command (small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the end of the sudden probability change big hit game. The game control microcomputer 90560 is configured to send an ending designation command for suddenly probabilistic jackpot end designation when it is a sudden probability change jackpot, but not to send an ending designation command when it is a small hit. May be good.

The command A400 (H) is an effect control command (a command for designating a prize for the prize opening) that specifies that the winning of the game ball has been detected in the prize opening.

The command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the normal state. The command B001 (H) is an effect control command (probability change state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the probability change state. The command B002 (H) is an effect control command (time saving state background designation command) for designating the background display when the gaming state is the time saving state.

The command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number addition designation command) that specifies that the first hold storage number has increased by 1. The command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number addition designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has been increased by 1. The command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the first hold storage number has decreased by 1. The command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second hold storage number subtraction designation command) for designating that the second hold storage number has decreased by 1.

In the other embodiment, as the hold information capable of specifying the hold storage number, the first hold storage number addition designation command, the second hold storage number addition designation command, the first hold storage number subtraction designation command, and the first 2 The case where the hold storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, as the hold information, an effect control command (first hold memory number specification command) that specifies the first hold memory number itself, and an effect control command (second hold memory number specification command) that specifies the second hold memory number itself. May be configured to send. Further, for example, as the hold information, an effect control command (total hold memory number specification command) for designating the total number (total hold memory number) which is the total of the first hold memory number and the second hold memory number is transmitted. It may be configured as. In this case, when the total pending memory number designation information is configured to be transmitted, for example, an effect control command (first start prize designation command) for designating that the first start prize has been given, or a second start win prize. By sending an effect control command (second start winning prize designation command) that specifies that there was, it is possible to specify which of the first hold storage number and the second hold storage number has increased. Good.

(Specifically, the effect control for CPU90101) performance control board 9080 microcomputer for performance control is mounted on the 90100, the above-mentioned effect control from the micro-competent-menu data 90560 for game control mounted on the main board 9031 When the command is received, the display state of the effect display device 909 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is sent to the audio output board 9070 according to the contents shown in FIGS. 36 and 37. Output.

38 and 39 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S9026) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. As described above, in the special symbol process process, a process for controlling the first special symbol display 908a or the second special symbol display 908b and the grand prize opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 9056 starts the first start winning opening 9013 if the first starting opening switch 9013a for detecting that the game ball has won is turned on, that is, the first starting winning opening 9013. If a prize has been won, the first start port switch passage process is executed (steps S9031, S90312). Further, when the second start opening switch 9014a for detecting that the game ball has won the second start winning opening 9014 is turned on, the CPU 9056 has generated the start winning to the second start winning opening 9014. Then, the second start port switch passing process is executed (steps S90313 and S90314). Then, any of the processes of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed. If the first start port switch 9013a or the second start port switch 9014a is not turned on, any of steps S90300 to S90310 is performed according to the internal state.

The processes of steps S90300 to S90310 are as follows.

Special symbol normal processing (step S90300): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the game control microcomputer 90560 is in a state where the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the storage number of the numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer (total hold storage number) is confirmed. The number of numerical data stored in the hold storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total hold storage counter. Further, if the count value of the total pending storage counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. If you want to make a big hit, set the big hit flag. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90301 (1 in this example). The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game ends.

Fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is defined as the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, control is performed to transmit a fluctuation pattern command according to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100, and a fluctuation time timer for measuring the fluctuation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90302 (2 in this example).

Display result designation command transmission process (step S90302): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. Control is performed to send a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90303 (3 in this example).

Special symbol changing process (step S90303): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the fluctuation pattern setting process elapses (the fluctuation time timer set in step S90301 times out, that is, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the symbol is confirmed on the effect control microcomputer 90100. Controls the transmission of the specified command, and updates the internal state (special symbol process flag) to the value corresponding to step S90304 (4 in this example). The effect control microcomputer 90100 controls the effect display device 909 to stop the fourth symbol when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 90560 is received.

Special symbol stop processing (step S90304): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the jackpot flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90308 (8 in this example). If neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example). In the other embodiment, the special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process will be described later based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4. The display control data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 49), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process in step S9022. ..

Pre-processing for opening the large winning opening (step S90305): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the pre-processing for opening the large winning opening, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, the control is performed to send the command indicating that the large winning opening is open to the microcomputer 90100 for effect control, the execution time of the processing during opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set in step S90306. Update to the value corresponding to (6 in this example). The large winning opening pre-opening process is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the large winning opening pre-opening process is also a process for starting a big hit game. Further, since the value for designating the round is set in the EXT data and transmitted for the command for specifying the opening of the large winning opening, a different command for specifying the opening for the large winning opening is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the jackpot game, a command (A101 (H)) for specifying round 1 is transmitted and the tenth round during the jackpot game is executed. Is transmitted with a command (A10A (H)) during which the large winning opening is open to specify round 10.

Processing during opening of the large winning opening (step S90306): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the large winning opening, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the large winning opening is performed. If the closing condition of the big winning opening is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90305 (5 in this example). In addition, control is performed to send a designated command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 after the jackpot is opened, and when all rounds are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S90307 (this). In the example, update to 7).

Jackpot end processing (step S90307): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control for notifying the player that the jackpot game state has ended. In addition, a process of setting a flag indicating the game state (for example, a probability change flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

Small hit release preprocessing (step S90308): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control is performed to open the large winning opening. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the large winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 9021 is driven to open the large winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the process during the opening of the large winning opening is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90309 (9 in this example). The small hit opening pre-processing is executed every time the large winning opening is opened during the small hit game, but when the first opening during the small hit game is started, the small hit opening preprocessing is performed by the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

Small hit opening process (step S90309): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. Performs processing to confirm the establishment of the closing conditions for the grand prize opening. If the closing condition of the large winning opening is satisfied and the number of times the large winning opening is opened still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to the value corresponding to step S90308 (8 in this example). Update. When all the releases are completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90310 (10 in this example).

Small hit end process (step S90310): Executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed so that the effect control microcomputer 90100 performs display control for notifying the player that the small hit game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S90300 (0 in this example).

FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the start port switch passing process in steps S90312 and S90314. Of these, FIG. 40 (A) is a flowchart showing the process of passing the first start port switch in step S90312. Further, FIG. 40B is a flowchart showing the process of passing the second start port switch in step S90314.

First, the process of passing the first start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (A). In the first start port switch passing process executed when the first start port switch 9013a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the first (Whether or not the value of the first hold storage number counter for counting the number of hold storage numbers is 4) is confirmed (step S901211A). If the number of first reserved storage reaches the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the first hold storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the first hold storage number counter by 1 (step S9011212A), and at the same time, the value of the total hold storage number counter for counting the total hold storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S901213A).

Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and the counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in the storage area in the first hold storage buffer (see FIG. 41) (step S901214A). .. In the process of step S901214A, a random R'(random number for determining a jackpot) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1') which is a software random number, and a random number for determining a variable pattern type (random 2') And the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3') is not extracted in the first start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but is extracted at the start of fluctuation of the first special symbol. You may try to do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') in the variation pattern setting process described later. ..

FIG. 41 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 41, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit of the number of first reserved storages (4 in this example) is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. Further, in the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In another embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer include a random R'(random number for jackpot determination) which is a hardware random number and a random number for jackpot type determination (random 1) which is a software random number. ´), a random number for determining the variation pattern type (random 2 ′), and a random number for determining the variation pattern (random 3 ′) are stored. The first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer are formed in the RAM 9055.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901215A).

Next, the process of passing the second start port switch will be described with reference to FIG. 40 (B). In the second start port switch passing process executed when the second start port switch 9014a is in the ON state, the CPU 9056 determines whether or not the second hold storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the second hold). It is confirmed (whether or not the value of the second reserved memory counter for counting the number of memories is 4) (step S901211B). If the second reserved storage number has reached the upper limit, the process ends as it is.

If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 9056 increases the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S9011212B) and the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is increased by 1 (step S901213B).

Next, the CPU 9056 extracts values from the random number circuit 90503 and a counter for generating software random numbers, and executes a process of storing them in a storage area in the second hold storage buffer (see FIG. 41) (step S901214B). .. In the process of step S901214B, a random R'(random number for determining a jackpot) which is a hardware random number, a random number for determining a jackpot type (random 1') which is a software random number, and a random number for determining a variable pattern type (random 2') And the random number for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3') is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random numbers for determining the fluctuation pattern (random 3') are not extracted in the second start port switch passing process (at the time of starting winning) and stored in advance in the storage area, but are extracted at the start of fluctuation of the second special symbol. You may try to do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 90560 may directly extract a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating the variation pattern determination random number (random 3') in the variation pattern setting process described later. ..

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second hold storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901215B).

42 and 43 are flowcharts showing a special symbol normal process (step S90300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal processing, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the total pending storage number (step S9051). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage counter is checked. If the total number of pending storages is 0, if the customer waiting demo designation command has not yet been transmitted, the production control microcomputer 90100 is controlled to send the customer waiting demo designation command (step S9051A), and the process is performed. finish. For example, when the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted in step S9051A, the CPU 9056 sets the customer waiting demo designation command transmission flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after the customer waiting demo designation command is transmitted, the customer wait demo designation command is repeatedly waited based on the fact that the sent customer flag is set. You can control not to send the demo specification command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demo designation command sent flag may be reset when the next variation display of the special symbol is started.

If the total reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S9052). Specifically, the value of the second reserved storage counter is confirmed. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 9056 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether the special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or the special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Set the data indicating "second" in (step S9053). If the second reserved storage number is 0, the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating "first" in the special symbol pointer (step S9054).

By executing the processes of steps S9052 to S9054, in the other embodiment, the variation display of the second special symbol is executed with priority over the variation display of the first special symbol. Not limited to the mode shown in the other embodiments, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are displayed in the order of winning the first starting winning opening 9013 and the second starting winning opening 9014. It may be configured to do so.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the reserved storage number = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer in the RAM 9055 and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055 (step S9055). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 has each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = 1 in the first reserved storage buffer. Is read and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 9056 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 9055.

Then, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the hold storage counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S9056). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first hold storage counter and sets each storage area in the first hold storage buffer. Shift the content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second hold storage counter is subtracted by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second hold storage buffer are shifted.

That is, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 9056 moves to the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 9055. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n-1.

Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number (or each second reserved storage number) is always the first reserved storage number (or the first reserved storage number). The order of the second reserved storage number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 is matched.

Then, the CPU 9056 reduces the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage counter is subtracted by 1 (step S9058). The CPU 9056 stores the value of the total pending storage counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 9055.

Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 according to the current gaming state (step S9060). In this case, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the probability change state background designation command when the probability change flag indicating the probability change state is set. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit only the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set, and if the probability change flag is not set, the time saving state background designation command is transmitted. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the normal state background designation command if neither the probability change flag nor the time saving flag is set.

Specifically, when the CPU 9056 transmits the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 90100, the CPU 9056 assigns the address of the command transmission table (previously set in the ROM for each command) corresponding to the effect control command. Set to the pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S9028). In the other embodiment, when the special symbol variation is started, the background specification command, the variation pattern command, the display result specification command, the first hold storage number subtraction specification command, or the second is used for each timer interrupt. It will be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100 in the order of the hold storage number subtraction designation command. Specifically, when starting the variation of the special symbol, the background specification command is first transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms, the display result specification command is transmitted after 4 ms, and then 4 ms later. The first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted. When the special symbol variation is started, the symbol variation specification command (first symbol variation specification command, second symbol variation specification command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation specification command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 90100.

In the special symbol normal processing, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first start winning opening 9013, that is, the "first" indicating that the processing is executed for the first special symbol. , Or the data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 9014, that is, the "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, the processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processing of steps S90300 to S90310 can be shared between the case where the first special symbol is targeted and the case where the second special symbol is targeted.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random R'(random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 9056 is for jackpot determination extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S901214B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and make a big hit judgment. The big hit judgment module compares a predetermined big hit judgment value or small hit judgment value (see FIG. 35) with a random number for big hit judgment, and if they match, executes a process of deciding to make a big hit or a small hit. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes processing of big hit determination and small hit determination.

In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the probability of becoming a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is in the non-probability state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the number of jackpot judgment values is probabilistically changed between the jackpot determination table (the table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 35 (A) in ROM 9054 is set) in which a large number of jackpot determination values are set in advance. A normal time jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical value on the left side of FIG. 35A in ROM 9054 is set) is provided, which is set less than the hour jackpot determination table. Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, and when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state, the CPU 9056 performs a jackpot determination process using the probabilistic jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination process is performed using the normal jackpot determination table. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 35 (A), the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a big hit. If it is decided to make a big hit (step S9061), the process proceeds to step S9071. It should be noted that deciding whether or not to make a big hit means deciding whether or not to shift to the big hit game state, but deciding whether or not to make the stop symbol on the special symbol display a big hit symbol. But also.

It should be noted that confirmation of whether or not the current gaming state is in the probabilistic state is performed depending on whether or not the probabilistic flag is set. The probability change flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state, and is reset when the probability change state is finished. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probability change jackpot" or a "sudden change jackpot", and is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Then, after the big hit game is completed, it is reset when the next big hit occurs.

If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S9061), the CPU 9056 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 35B and 35C). Use to process small hit determination. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R') matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and 35 (C), the CPU 9056 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. .. In this case, the CPU 9056 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "first", the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 35 (B). ) Is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 35 (C) is used to determine whether or not to make a small hit. .. Then, when it is decided to make a small hit (step S9062), the CPU 9056 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S9063), and proceeds to step S9075.

If the value of the random R'does not match either the big hit determination value or the small hit determination value (N in step S9062), that is, if it is out of the range, the process proceeds to step S9075 as it is.

In step S9071, the CPU 9056 sets a jackpot flag indicating that it is a jackpot. Then, as the table used to determine the jackpot type to one of the plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S9072). Specifically, CPU9056, when special symbol pointer indicates "first" selects the jackpot type-size Teite Buru 90131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 35 (D). Further, CPU9056, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", selects the jackpot type-size Teite Buru 90131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 35 (E).

Next, the CPU 9056 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to use the type corresponding to the value corresponding to the value of the random number (random 1') for determining the jackpot type stored in the random number buffer area ("normal jackpot", "normal jackpot", " "Probability change jackpot" or "Sudden change jackpot") is determined as the type of jackpot (step S9073). In this case, the CPU 9056 determines the jackpot type extracted in step S901214A of the first start port switch passage process and step S901214B of the second start port switch pass process and stored in advance in the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer. Read the random number and determine the jackpot type. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 35 (D) and 35 (E), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, it is compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, the ratio of sudden change jackpots is high.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 9055 (step S9074). For example, when the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "01" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type, and when the jackpot type is "probability variation jackpot", "02" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type. When the jackpot type is "sudden probability change jackpot", "03" is set as the data indicating the jackpot type.

Next, the CPU 9056 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S9075). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-", which is an outlier symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the jackpot flag is set, any one of the jackpot symbols "1", "3", and "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly probable jackpot", "1" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol, and when it is determined to be "normal jackpot", "3" is determined to be the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, when the "probability change jackpot" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. When the small hit flag is set, "5", which is the small hit symbol, is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol.

In the other embodiment, the case where the jackpot type is first determined and the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined jackpot type is determined is shown, but the method of determining the jackpot type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is , Not limited to those shown in other embodiments. For example, if a table in which the stop symbol of the special symbol is associated with the jackpot type is prepared in advance and the stop symbol of the special symbol is first determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, the corresponding jackpot is determined based on the determination result. The type may also be determined.

Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the fluctuation pattern setting process (step S90301) (step S9076).

FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern setting process (step S90301) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S9081). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects one of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables as the table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types (step). S9082). Then, the process proceeds to step S9900.

If the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S9083). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 selects the small hit variation pattern type determination table as the table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types (step S9084). ). Then, the process proceeds to step S9900.

If the small hit flag is not set, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the time saving state is set is set (step S9085). The time saving flag is set when the game state is changed to the probability change state or the time saving state, and is reset when the time saving state is finished. Specifically, when it is determined to be a "normal jackpot", a time saving flag is set in the process of ending the jackpot game. Further, after the jackpot game is completed, the reset is performed when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in other embodiments) is completed. Even before the end of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, the time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs. Further, when it is determined to be "probability change big hit" or "sudden change big hit", the probability change flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability change flag.

If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S9085), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (step S9086). If the total number of pending storage is less than 3 (N in step S9086), the CPU 9056 determines the variation pattern type for normal use as a table used to determine the variation pattern type to one of a plurality of types. Select a table (step S9087). Then, the process proceeds to step S9900.

When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S9086), the CPU 9056 uses the table used to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types, and the variation pattern for shortening is used as a table. The type determination table is selected (step S9088). Then, the process proceeds to step S9900.

When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S9085), that is, when the gaming state is in the probabilistic state or the time saving state (in other embodiments, the time saving is always made when shifting to the probabilistic state). Since it is also shifted to the state (see steps S90169 and S90170), when it is determined to be Y in step S9085, it may be in the probabilistic state or controlled only in the time saving state), so that the CPU 9056 fluctuates. As a table used to determine the pattern type to be one of a plurality of types, a time-saving variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected (step S9089). Then, the process proceeds to step S9900.

In another embodiment, when the processing of steps S9085 to S9089 is executed and the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the variation pattern type for shortening is lost. The judgment table is selected. Further, when the gaming state is a probability change state or a time saving state, the time saving variation pattern type determination table for loss is selected. In this case, in the process of step S9090 described later, the fluctuation pattern type including the shortened fluctuation fluctuation pattern may be determined as the fluctuation pattern type, and when the fluctuation pattern type including the shortened fluctuation fluctuation pattern is determined, the fluctuation pattern type is determined. In the process of step S9092, the variation pattern of the shortened variation is determined as the variation pattern. Therefore, in the other embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability change state or the time saving state, or when the total number of reserved storages is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortened variation may be performed.

Next, the CPU 9056 reads a random number 2'(random number for determining the variation pattern type) from the random number buffer area (first hold storage buffer or second hold storage buffer), and selects it in the process of steps S9082, S9084, S9087, S9088 or S9089. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S9090).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets the hit variation pattern determination table and the loss variation pattern determination table as tables used to determine the variation pattern to one of a plurality of types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S9090. One of them is selected (step S9091). Further, the random number 3'(random number for determining the variation pattern) is read from the random number buffer area (first reserved storage buffer or the second reserved storage buffer), and the variation is changed by referring to the variation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S9091. The pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S9092). When the random number 3'(random number for determining the variation pattern) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 9056 is for determining the variation pattern for generating the random number for determining the variation pattern (random number 3'). A value may be extracted directly from the random number counter, and the fluctuation pattern may be determined based on the extracted random number value.

Next, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9093). Specifically, the CPU 9056 controls to send the first symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "first". Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "second". Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the effect control command (variation pattern command) corresponding to the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S9094).

Next, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 9055 (step S9095). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302) (step S9096).

FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S90302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 9056 transmits one of the display result 1 designation to the display result 5 designation (see FIG. 36) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, and loss. Control to do. Specifically, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S90120). If it is not set, the process proceeds to step S90126. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S90112 and S90122). It should be noted that whether or not it is a "normal jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". .. Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command when the type of the jackpot is "probability variation jackpot" (steps S90123 and S90124). It should be noted that whether or not it is a "probability variation jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "02". .. Then, when it is neither "normal jackpot" nor "probability jackpot" (that is, when it is "suddenly probabilistic jackpot"), the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 4 designated command (step S90125).

On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S90120), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90126). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 5 designated command (step S90127). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90126), that is, when it is off, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S90128).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S90303) (step S90129).

FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a special symbol changing process (step S90303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol change processing, the CPU 9056 first confirms whether or not the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted (step S901121). Whether or not the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted is determined by, for example, in step S901122 described later, the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command. When the number subtraction specification command is transmitted, the hold storage number subtraction specification command indicating that the first hold storage number subtraction specification command or the second hold storage number subtraction specification command has been transmitted is set so that the transmitted flag is set, and in step S901121 , The hold storage number subtraction specification command It is sufficient to confirm whether or not the sent flag is set. Further, in this case, the set hold storage number subtraction specification command transmission flag should be reset by the special symbol stop processing or the jackpot end processing described later when the variable display of the special symbol is terminated or the jackpot is terminated. Just do it.

Next, if the first hold storage number subtraction designation command or the second hold storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 9056 issues the hold storage number subtraction designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 90100. Is controlled to be transmitted to (step S901122). Specifically, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the first hold storage number subtraction designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "first". Further, the CPU 9056 controls to transmit the second hold storage number subtraction designation command when the special symbol pointer indicates "second".

Next, the CPU 9056 subtracts 1 from the fluctuation time timer (step S901125), and when the fluctuation time timer times out (step S901126), controls to send a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S901127). Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S90304) (step S901128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process ends as it is.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process (step S90304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot flag is set (step S90131). When the jackpot flag is set, the CPU 9056, if set, has a probability variation flag indicating that it is in a probability variation state, a time reduction flag indicating that it is in a time reduction state, and the number of variable times of the special symbol in the time reduction state. The time reduction counter indicating (step S90132) is reset (step S90132), and control is performed to send a jackpot start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90133). Specifically, when the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot" or "probability variation jackpot", the jackpot start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of jackpot is a sudden probability change jackpot, a small hit / sudden probability change jackpot start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. Whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden probability variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 9055 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). Judgment is based on.

Further, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the jackpot display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the jackpot, for example, in the effect display device 909) in the timer before opening the jackpot (step S90134). In addition, the number of times of opening of the large winning opening opening counter is set (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability change big hit", and 2 times in the case of "sudden change big hit") (step S90135). .. In addition, the round time per round in the jackpot game is also set. Specifically, in the case of a sudden big hit, 0.1 seconds is set as the round time, and in the case of a normal big hit or a probable big hit, 29 seconds is set as the round time. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the large winning opening pre-opening process (step S90305) (step S90136).

Further, if the jackpot flag is not set in step S9011, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the time reduction counter indicating the variable number of times of the special symbol in the time reduction state is 0 (step S90137). If the value of the time reduction counter is not 0, the CPU 9056 decrements the value of the time reduction counter by -1 (step S90138). Then, when the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S90139), the CPU 9056 resets the time reduction flag (step S90140).

Next, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S90141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 9056 transmits a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 90100 (step S90142). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a value corresponding to the small hit display time (time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit by, for example, the effect display device 909) in the timer before opening the large winning opening (step S90143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the large winning opening opening number counter (step S90144). In addition, the opening time for each large winning opening in the small hit game is also set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds, which is the same as the round time of the sudden change big hit, is set as the opening time per big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the small hit start pre-processing (step S90308) (step S90145).

If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S90141), the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) (step S90146).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a jackpot end process (step S90307) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S90160), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, proceeds to step S90164. If the jackpot end display timer is not set, the jackpot flag is reset (step S90161), and control is performed to send a jackpot end designation command (step S90162). Here, if it is a "normal jackpot" or a "probability change jackpot", a jackpot end specification command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is a "sudden probability variation jackpot", a small hit / sudden probability variation jackpot The end specification command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the jackpot end display is being performed on the effect display device 909 (big hit end display time) is set in the jackpot end display timer (step S90163), and the process is terminated.

In step S90164, the value of the jackpot end display timer is subtracted by 1 (step S90164). Then, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, that is, whether or not the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step S90165). If it has not passed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (Y in step S90165), the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the jackpot ending this time is a normal jackpot (step S90166). It should be noted that whether or not it is a "normal jackpot" can be specifically determined by confirming whether or not the data set in the jackpot type buffer in step S9074 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". .. If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 9056 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S90167). Further, the CPU 9056 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time reduction counter (step S90168).

If it is not a normal jackpot (that is, if it is a probability variation jackpot or a sudden probability variation jackpot), the CPU 9056 sets the probability variation flag to shift to the probability variation state (step S90169), and sets the time saving flag to shift to the time saving state. (Step S90170).

Then, the CPU 9056 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal processing (step S90300) (step S90171).

FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of the special symbol display control process (step S9032) executed by the game control microcomputer 90560 (specifically, CPU 9056) mounted on the main board 9031. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S903201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol change processing is being executed), the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol change display for setting the special symbol display control data. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S903202). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets or updates special symbol display control data for variable display of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variable display of the special symbol on the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 9056 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S903203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when the process shifts to the special symbol stop processing), the CPU 9056 stops and displays the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S903204). In this case, the CPU 9056 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (first special symbol or second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S9022) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol indicators 908a and 908b.

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the effect control microcomputer 90100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 90101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 9080. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 90101 starts executing the main process. In the main process, first, the initialization process for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing the timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S90701). ..

After that, the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to the loop process for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S90702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 90101 clears the flag (step S90703) and executes the following effect control process.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 90101 first analyzes the received effect control command and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S90704).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the effect control process process (step S90705). In the effect control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the effect display device 909 is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 performs the fourth symbol process process (step S90706). In the fourth symbol process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected from the processes corresponding to the control state in the fourth symbol display area 909c, 909d of the effect display device 909. The display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

Next, a random number update process for updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a random number for determining a jackpot symbol is executed (step S90707). After that, the process proceeds to step S90702.

FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing an effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 90560 of the main board 9031. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte production control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is composed of a 12-byte area of the reception command buffers 1 to 12. Then, a command reception number counter is used to indicate in which area the received command is stored. The command reception number counter takes a value from 0 to 11. It does not necessarily have to be in the ring buffer format.

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S90704). The effect control command received from the main board 9031 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not the received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S90611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 90101 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S90612). After reading, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S90613). The reason for +2 is that it reads 2 bytes (1 command) at a time.

If the received effect control command is a variation pattern command (step S90614), the effect control CPU 90101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S90615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90616).

If the received effect control command is a display result specification command (step S90617), the effect control CPU 90101 forms the received display result specification command (display result 1 designation command to display result 5 designation command) in the RAM. It is stored in the display result specification command storage area (step S90618).

If the received effect control command is a symbol confirmation designation command (step S90619), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S90620).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot start designation command (step S90621), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the jackpot start designation command reception flag (step S90622).

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command (step S90623), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag (step S90624).

If the received effect control command is a jackpot end designation command (step S90625), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the jackpot end designation command reception flag (step S90626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command (step S90627), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the small hit / sudden probability change big hit end designation command reception flag (step S90628).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (step S90629). Then, the process proceeds to step S90611.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S90705) in the main process shown in FIG. 50. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 90101 performs any process of steps S90800 to S90807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following processes are executed. In the effect control process process, the display state of the effect display device 909 is controlled to realize the variable display of the effect symbol, but the control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the first special symbol is also the second. Control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the fluctuation of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process.

Fluctuation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800): It is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 90560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the variation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001).

Effect symbol variation start process (step S98001): Control is performed so that the effect symbol variation is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S90802).

Processing during effect symbol fluctuation (step S90802): Controls the switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) constituting the fluctuation pattern, and monitors the end of the fluctuation time. Then, when the fluctuation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop process (step S90803).

Effect symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S90803): Control is performed to stop the variation of the effect symbol and derive and display the display result (stop symbol). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

Big hit display process (step S90804): After the end of the fluctuation time, the effect display device 909 is controlled to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of the big hit. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S90805).

Processing during the round (step S90805): Display control during the round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round is not completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the round post-processing (step S90806). If the final round is completed, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot end process (step S90807).

Round post-processing (step S90806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the processing during the round (step S90805).

Jackpot end effect processing (step S90807): The effect display device 909 performs display control to notify the player that the jackpot game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800).

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 53. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S90811). If the variation pattern command reception flag is set, the variation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S90812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001) (step S90813).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S98001) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. 53. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 90101 first reads the variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S908000). Next, the effect control CPU 90101 displays the effect symbol display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S908000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). The symbol) is determined (step S908001). When the pseudo-ream is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 90101 has a chance pattern symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol of the pseudo-ream in step S908001. , A combination of a jackpot symbol that does not reach but one symbol is out of alignment) is also determined. The effect control CPU 90101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 909. In the example shown in FIG. 56, when the received display result designation command indicates "normal jackpot" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 is stopped. As the symbols, the combination of the effect symbols in which the three symbols are the same even-numbered symbols is determined. In addition, when the received display result specification command indicates "probability variation jackpot" (when the received display result specification command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 90101 has 3 symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination of production symbols with the same odd-numbered symbols.

If the received display result specification command indicates "sudden probability change big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result specification command is a display result 4 designation command or a display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 90101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as the stop symbol. Then, in the case of "off" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), the combination of the effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when a reach effect is involved, the combination of the effect symbols with the two left and right symbols aligned is determined. Further, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 909 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

For example, the effect control CPU 90101 extracts a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and the numerical value are associated with each other to generate the stop symbol of the effect symbol. decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical value corresponding to the extracted random number.

As for the production symbols, the stop symbol (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right are all the same symbol) reminiscent of a jackpot is called a jackpot symbol. In addition, a stop symbol that reminds us of an outlier is called an outlier symbol. Further, a symbol that reminds us of being in a probabilistic state (an odd number symbol in other embodiments) is also called a probabilistic symbol, and a symbol that reminds us that it will not be in a probabilistic state (an even symbol in other embodiments). Is also called an odd-numbered pattern.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a specific effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of execution of the specific effect using the effect accessory 90201 (step S908002).

In addition, in other embodiments, although the description is omitted, various notice effects (for example, step-up notice effect, character notice effect, button notice effect, character advance notice effect) are performed during the variable display of the effect symbol. , Group notice production, mini character notice production) may be configured to be feasible. In this case, for example, in the effect symbol variation start process, if the advance notice effect setting process for determining the presence / absence and type of the advance notice effect is executed and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the advance notice is given in step S908003 described later. It may be configured to select the process table according to the production.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern (step S908003). Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in step S908003 (step S908004).

FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data to be referred to when the effect control CPU 90101 executes control of the effect device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the effect device (effect component) such as the effect display device 909 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of a collection of a plurality of combinations of process timer setting values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data. The display control execution data includes data and the like indicating each variation mode constituting the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of the effect symbol. Specifically, data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 909 is described. Further, in the process timer set value, the fluctuation time in the mode of fluctuation is set. The effect control CPU 90101 refers to the process table and controls the display control to display the effect symbol in the variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

The process table shown in FIG. 57 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 9080. In addition, the process table is prepared according to each fluctuation pattern.

In the process table used when executing the effect control for the fluctuation pattern accompanied by the reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the fluctuation, and the right symbol is stopped when the predetermined time elapses. Process data indicating that it is to be displayed is set. In addition, instead of setting the symbol to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the image for displaying the symbol is synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbol, the pseudo-ream, and the temporary stop symbol in the sliding effect. You may.

Further, the effect control CPU 90101 serves as an effect device (effect display device 909 as an effect component, as an effect component) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). Control of various lamps and the speaker 9027) as an effect component is executed (step S908005). For example, the effect display device 909 outputs a command to the VDP 90109 in order to display an image corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. Further, in order to control the lighting / extinguishing of various lamps, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 9035. Further, in order to output the sound from the speaker 9027, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 9070.

In another embodiment, the effect control CPU 90101 controls the variation pattern command so that the effect pattern is variably displayed according to the variation pattern corresponding to one-to-one, but the effect control CPU 90101 is variable. The fluctuation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns corresponding to the pattern command.

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S908006).

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol changing process (step S98002) (step S908007).

FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing a specific effect setting process (step S908002) in the effect symbol variation start process. In the specific effect setting process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not the variation display started this time is a big hit (step S905001). Whether or not the variable display started this time is a big hit can be determined, for example, by checking the display result specification command stored in the display result specification command storage area. Further, for example, it may be determined by confirming whether or not the fluctuation pattern command read in step S908000 specifies a fluctuation pattern for big hits.

If the variation display started this time is a big hit (Y in step S905001), the effect control CPU 90101 selects a specific effect determination table for the big hit as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the specific effect. (Step S905002). Unless the variation display started this time is a big hit (N in step S905001), the effect control CPU 90101 selects a specific effect determination table for removal as a table for determining the presence / absence and type of the specific effect. (Step S905003). Then, the effect control CPU 90101 executes a lottery process based on random numbers using the specific effect determination table selected in steps S905002 and S905003, and determines the presence / absence and type of the specific effect (step S905004).

FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the specific effect determination table. Of these, FIG. 59 (A) shows a specific example of the specific effect determination table for the jackpot selected in step S905002. Further, FIG. 59B shows a specific example of the specific effect determination table for deviation selected in step S905003. As shown in FIG. 59, in the specific effect determination table, determination values are assigned to each of the specific effect none, the specific effect A, the specific effect B, and the specific effect C.

In another embodiment, as a specific effect, an effect of lighting and displaying the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201 is executed. In the other embodiment, the specific effect A to the specific effect A to the specific effect. There are three types of C, and the specific effect A is an effect of causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light with a white lighting color. Further, the specific effect B is an effect of causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light in a red lighting color. Further, the specific effect C is an effect in which the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 is made to emit light by changing the lighting color in order to emit light by rainbow color display (rainbow display).

Further, in the other embodiment, when the specific effect is executed, the suggestion effect suggesting the specific effect is executed. As the suggestion effect, the effect of vibrating the push button 90120 is executed. As shown in FIG. 59, in the other embodiment, the vibration time of the push button 90120 differs depending on which type of specific effect is executed, and when the specific effect A is executed, the push button 90120 is pushed. The vibration time of the button 90120 is 1 second. Further, when the specific effect B is executed, the vibration time of the push button 90120 is 3 seconds. Further, when the specific effect C is executed, the vibration time of the push button 90120 is 5 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the other embodiment, the determination value is assigned so that the ratio of executing the specific effect is higher in the case of a big hit than in the case of the loss. , When the specific effect is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the specific effect is not executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in the other embodiment, in the case of a big hit, the ratio of the specific effect B being executed is higher than that in the case of the loss. The determination value is assigned to, and when the specific effect B is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the specific effect A is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 59, in other embodiments, the determination value is assigned so that the specific effect C may be executed only when a big hit occurs, and the specific effect C is executed. It is confirmed that it will be a big hit. Therefore, when the specific effect C is executed, the degree of expectation for the big hit (big hit reliability) is higher than that when the specific effect A and the specific effect B are executed.

In addition, in this other embodiment, a case is shown in which it is determined that a big hit will be obtained if the specific effect C is executed, but the case is not limited to such a mode and is a case of being out of order. The specific effect C may be configured to be executable at a low rate, and at least when the specific effect C is executed, the jackpot is hit as compared with the case where the specific effect A or the specific effect B is executed. It suffices if it is configured so that the degree of expectation (reliability of big hit) is high.

Further, in other embodiments, the jackpot reliability is increased when the specific effect is executed, or the jackpot reliability is increased in the order of the specific effect C, the specific effect B, and the specific effect A. However, it is not limited to such a mode. For example, when a specific effect is executed, the reach reliability and the probability change reliability are set to be high, or the reach reliability and the probability change reliability are set to be high in the order of the specific effect B and the specific effect A. May be good.

Further, in other embodiments, the case where there are three types of specific effects A to C as the types of specific effects is shown, but the specific effects are not limited to such modes, and for example, one type or two types of specific effects are shown. Only may be configured to be executable, or four or more types of specific effects may be configured to be executable. For example, a specific effect type may be provided in which the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 is made to emit light in a lighting color of blue or green.

Further, in the other embodiment, the case where the type of the specific effect and the vibration time of the push button 90120 have a one-to-one correspondence is shown, but it is not necessarily limited to such a mode. For example, even when the vibration time of the push button 90120 is 1 second, the specific effect A is not always executed, and the specific effect B and the specific effect C may be executed at a low rate. It may be configured as.

Further, in another embodiment, as a kind of suggestion effect, a case where the vibration time of the push button 90120 is different is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, as a type of suggestion effect, the intensity of the vibration operation of the push button 90120 may be different, the vibration speed may be different, or the vibration pattern may be different (for example, the push button 90120 may be continuously vibrated. (It may be vibrated intermittently, or it may be vibrated intermittently). Further, the vibration time, vibration intensity, vibration speed, and vibration pattern of the push button 90120 may be combined to form the type of suggestion effect.

Further, in the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the presence / absence and type of the specific effect or the suggestion effect are different depending on whether or not the hit is a big hit, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, a different specific effect determination table may be selected according to the type of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern command, and the presence / absence and type of the specific effect and the suggestion effect may be different. In this case, for example, the fluctuation pattern including Super Reach B is configured to make it easier to execute the specific effect or suggestion effect than the variation pattern including Super Reach A, or the type of specific effect or suggestion effect with high expectation is performed. It may be configured to be easy to select. Further, for example, a fluctuation pattern having a large number of pseudo-reams is configured to be easier to execute a specific effect or a suggestion effect than a variation pattern with a small number of pseudo-reams, or a type of specific effect or suggestion effect with a high degree of expectation is selected. It may be configured for ease of use.

Further, in the other embodiment, the case where the suggestion effect is always executed when the specific effect is executed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and for example, in FIG. 59, further suggestion is made. A specific effect D that does not involve the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as an effect may be provided. Further, not only the push button 90120 may not be vibrated, but also the blackout display, the frame LED 9028 may be turned off, and the button LED 90360 may not be turned on, or any one of these may be configured. It may be configured not to perform a plurality or all.

Further, in the other embodiment, as shown in FIG. 59, the presence / absence and type of the specific effect and the suggestion effect are collectively determined by one lottery process, but the specific effect and the suggestion effect are collectively determined. And may be configured to be determined by separate lottery processes. Then, by determining the specific effect and the suggestion effect by separate lottery processes, a pattern that executes both the specific effect and the suggestion effect and a pattern that executes only the specific effect (the specific effect is not noticed so much). It may be configured to have a pattern to be executed) and a pattern to execute only the suggestion effect (so-called Gase pattern).

Then, when it is decided to execute the specific effect (step S905005), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the specific effect execution flag according to the type of the determined specific effect (step S905006). For example, if it is decided to execute the specific effect A, the specific effect A execution flag is set, and if it is decided to execute the specific effect B, the specific effect B execution flag is set, and the specific effect C is set. If it is decided to execute, the specific effect C execution flag is set.

60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the effect symbol changing process (step S90802) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 90101 first subtracts 1 from the process timer value (step S908101) and 1 subtracts the value of the variation time timer (step S908102). When the process timer times out (step S908103), the process data is switched. That is, the next set process timer setting value in the process table is set in the process timer (step S908104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S908105).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not any of the specific effect execution flags (any of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) is set (step S908106). If none of the specific effect execution flags is set, the process proceeds to step S908126. If any of the specific effect execution flags is set, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the darkening display (blackout display) (step S908107). Whether or not it is the start timing of the blackout display can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol fluctuation start processing. If it is the start timing of the blackout display (Y in step S908107), the effect control CPU 90101 starts the darkening display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 (step S908108) and the frame LED 9028. Are all turned off (step S908109). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

If it is not the start timing of the blackout display (N in step S908107), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the suggestion effect (step S908110). It should be noted that whether or not it is the start timing of the suggestion effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol variation start process. Further, in the other embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the suggestion effect arrives at the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) elapses after the start timing of the darkening display.

If it is the start timing of the suggestion effect (Y in step S908110), the effect control CPU 90101 starts driving the vibrator motor 90126 and starts the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as the suggestion effect (step S908111). .. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 sets a value corresponding to the vibration time according to the type of the specific effect in the vibration time timer for measuring the vibration time of the push button 90120 (step S908112). For example, if the specific effect A execution flag is set, the vibration time timer is set to a value equivalent to 1 second, and if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the vibration time timer is set to 3 seconds. If the specific effect C execution flag is set, the value corresponding to 5 seconds is set in the vibration time timer. Further, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the lighting display of the button LED 90360, and starts the lighting display of the push button 90120 as a suggestion effect (step S908113). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

In the other embodiment, the button LED 90360 is turned on and displayed by executing the process of step S908113, but the button LED 90360 is blinked and displayed regardless of such an embodiment. You may. Further, for example, the button LED 90360 may be made to emit light in various lighting colors or in various lighting patterns, and the button LED 90360 is subjected to a lottery process according to the jackpot expectation, reach expectation, and probability variation expectation. May be used to determine which lighting color or lighting pattern is used to emit light.

If it is not the start timing of the suggestion effect (N in step S908110), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (step S908114). If the value of the vibration time timer is not 0 (N in step S908114), that is, during the vibration operation of the push button 90120, the effect control CPU 90101 subtracts 1 from the value of the vibration time timer (step S908115) and subtracts it. It is confirmed whether or not the value of the subsequent vibration time timer is 0 (step S908116). If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (that is, when the vibration time of the push button 90120 is finished), the effect control CPU 90101 stops driving the vibrator motor 90126 and pushes as a suggestion effect. At the same time as ending the vibration operation of the button 90120 (step S908117), the lighting display of the button LED 90360 is ended, and the lighting display of the push button 90120 as a suggestion effect is ended (step S908118). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

If the value of the vibration time timer is 0 (Y in step S908114), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect (step S908119). Whether or not it is the start timing of the specific effect can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol variation start process. Further, in the other embodiment, it is assumed that the start timing of the specific effect arrives at the timing when a predetermined time (1 second in this example) elapses after the vibration time of the push button 90120 is finished.

If it is the start timing of the specific effect (Y in step S908119), the effect control CPU 90101 starts lighting and displaying the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201 with a display color corresponding to the type of the specific effect. Then, the execution of the specific effect is started (step S908120). For example, if the specific effect A execution flag is set, the effect of causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light with a white lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect B execution flag is set, the effect of causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light in a red lighting color is started. Further, if the specific effect C execution flag is set, the effect of rainbow-colored display (rainbow display) is started by causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light by changing the lighting color in order. To do. Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

If it is not the start timing of the specific effect (N in step S908119), the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not it is the end timing of the specific effect (step S908121). Whether or not the end timing of the specific effect is reached can be determined, for example, by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S908006 of the effect symbol variation start process. Further, in the other embodiment, the start timing of the specific effect arrives at the timing when the effect time (5 seconds in this example) of the predetermined specific effect elapses after the vibration time of the push button 90120 is finished. To do. The production time of the specific effect is not limited to 5 seconds, and may be configured to execute the specific effect for, for example, 7 seconds or 10 seconds.

If it is the end timing of the specific effect (Y in step S908121), the effect control CPU 90101 ends the darkening display (blackout display) in the effect display device 909 (step S908122), and at the same time, the effect symbol is changed. Correspondingly, the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is restarted (step S908123). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 ends the lighting display of the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201, and ends the execution of the specific effect (step S908124). Further, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set specific effect execution flag (any of the specific effect A execution flag to the specific effect C execution flag) (step S908125). Then, the process proceeds to step S908126.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the darkening display (blackout display) is ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is restarted at the timing of the end of the specific effect is shown. It is not limited to the aspect shown in the form. For example, the darkening display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be resumed during the vibration operation of the push button 90120 or at the timing of the end of the vibration operation, or the accessory LED 90202 of the effect accessory 90201 may be resumed. The darkening display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be restarted at the timing of starting the lighting display or during the lighting display. Further, for example, the darkening display (blackout display) may be ended or the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 may be restarted after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed from the end of the specific effect. Conceivable.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the execution timing of the suggestion effect and the specific effect is the same regardless of the type of the suggestion effect and the specific effect is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, even if the suggestion effect or the specific effect can be executed at a plurality of execution timings, such as executing the suggestion effect or the specific effect during high-speed fluctuation, executing when the reach is established, or executing the suggestion effect during the reach. Good. Further, in this case, for example, the jackpot expectation, the reach expectation, and the probability variation expectation may be different depending on at which execution timing the suggestion effect or the specific effect is executed.

Then, if the fluctuation time timer has timed out (step S908126), the effect control CPU 90101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) (step S908127).

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S90803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol fluctuation stop process, the effect control CPU 90101 first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag indicating that the stop symbol of the effect symbol is displayed is set (step S908301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, the process proceeds to step S908305. In another embodiment, when the jackpot symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S908304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed, but the fanfare effect has not yet been executed. Therefore, the process of displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S908302 is executed. Without doing so, the process proceeds to step S908305.

When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 90101 controls to stop and display the determined stop symbol (missing symbol, jackpot symbol) (step S908302).

Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S908302 (that is, when the out-of-order symbol is displayed) (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 shifts to step S908311. To do.

When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S908302 (Y in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S908304).

Next, the effect control CPU 90101 confirms whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received (step S908305). Whether or not any of the jackpot start designation commands has been received is specifically determined by a flag indicating that the jackpot start designation command set in the command analysis process has been received (big hit start designation command reception flag). It can be determined by checking whether or not the flag (small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag) indicating that the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command has been received is set. If any of the jackpot start designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S908306) and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S908307). If the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / sudden probability change big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 90101 resets the set flag.

Then, the effect control CPU 90101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S908308), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). Control of the effect device (effect display device 909 as the effect component, various lamps as the effect component, and speaker 9027 as the effect component) is executed according to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1) (step S908309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the jackpot display process (step S90804) (step S908310).

When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit is performed (N in step S908303), the effect control CPU 90101 responds to the effect pattern command reception waiting process (step S90800) by changing the value of the effect control process flag. Update to the value (step S908311).

Next, a specific example of the production mode of the suggestion effect and the specific effect will be described. FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the effect mode of the suggestion effect and the specific effect. In FIG. 63, the display screens change in the order of (1), (2), (3), and so on.

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), it is assumed that the effect display device 909 executes the variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols, and determines the execution of the specific effect at the start of the variation. At the start timing of the blackout display (blackout display), as shown in FIG. 63 (2), the blackout display (blackout display) of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is started (see step S908108). All the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off (see step S908109).

The example shown in FIG. 63 shows a case where the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is completely darkened when the blackout display is performed, but the present invention is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, even during dark display (blackout display), when the fourth symbol in the fourth symbol display areas 909c and 909d is continuously displayed or is configured to display some small symbol. The small symbol may be continuously displayed, or the right-handed display may be continuously displayed when the right-handed display suggesting the right-handed operation is performed. As such, even during the dark display (blackout display), the information necessary for the progress of the game may be continuously displayed.

Next, at the start timing of the suggestion effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (3), the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as the suggestion effect is started (see step S908111), and the lighting display of the button LED 90360 is started. The lighting display of the push button 90120 as a suggestion effect is started (see step S908113). In this case, when the push button 90120 is vibrated, the vibrated member 90303 inside the push button 90120 also vibrates, and the vibration of the vibrated member 90303 is emphasized and visually recognized.

Next, when the vibration time of the push button 90120 ends, as shown in FIG. 63 (4), the vibration operation of the push button 90120 as a suggestion effect ends (see step S908117), and the lighting display of the button LED 90360 ends. Then, the lighting display of the push button 90120 as a suggestion effect is terminated (see step S908118).

Next, at the start timing of the specific effect, as shown in FIG. 63 (5), the lighting display of the accessory LED 90202 provided on the effect accessory 90201 is started, and the execution of the specific effect is started (see step S908120). ). In this case, for example, when the specific effect A is executed, an effect of causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light with a white lighting color is started. Further, when the specific effect B is executed, an effect of causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light in a red lighting color is started. Further, when the specific effect C is executed, the effect of emitting light by rainbow color display (rainbow display) is started by causing the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 to emit light by changing the lighting color in order. Will be done.

Then, after that, when the production time of the specific effect (5 seconds in this example) elapses and the end timing of the specific effect is reached, the lighting display of the accessory LED 90202 provided in the effect accessory 90201 is terminated, and the specific effect is produced. Execution is terminated (see step S908124). Further, the darkening display (blackout display) in the effect display device 909 is also terminated (see step S908122), and the lighting display of the frame LED 9028 is restarted according to the variation display of the effect symbol (see step S908123).

As described above, according to the other embodiments, an effect device capable of performing the effect (in this example, the effect object 90201) and an movable movable body (in this example, the push button 90120). And. Further, it is possible to execute a specific effect (in this example, the specific effect of the aspect shown in FIG. 63 (5)) in the vicinity of the movable body by using the effect device, and the movable body can be operated when the specific effect is executed. (In this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is executed). Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of the specific effect.

Specifically, in the other embodiment, since the production accessory 90201 as the production device is provided below the game area 907, it is possible to make the light emission of the accessory LED 90202 of the production accessory 90201 stand out to some extent. However, at the time before the light emission, the player does not know which area of the game area 907 to pay attention to, and there is a possibility that the effect of the specific effect cannot be sufficiently obtained. Therefore, in another embodiment, the push button that vibrates by operating the movable body (push button 90120 in this example) provided in the vicinity of the effecting object 90201 (vibrating operation in this example). By directing the eyes to the 90120, the player's line of sight can be guided to the specific effect, and the effect of the specific effect can be improved.

In addition, "when the specific effect is executed" means, in other embodiments, specifically, a predetermined time (1 second in this example) elapses after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is completed. It is to execute a specific effect at the timing. In this way, the specific effect may be executed after a relatively short time (1 second in this example) has elapsed after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is completed, or the vibration of the push button 90120 may be executed. The operation and the specific effect may be executed at exactly the same timing, or the vibration time of the push button 90120 and the effect period of the specific effect partially overlap (for example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is started, it is still It may be configured to start the execution of the specific effect during the vibration operation). In this way, "when the specific effect is executed" means at least the vibration operation of the push button 90120 and the specific effect, even if the execution timings of the vibration operation of the push button 90120 and the specific effect are not exactly the same or the same. It suffices if it is executed at a timing that can be recognized as being executed correspondingly to and.

Further, in another embodiment, the case where the effect device (in this example, the effect accessory 90201) is provided on the game board 906 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the effect accessory used for the specific effect may be provided on the game frame in the vicinity of the push button 90120.

Further, "near the movable body" means, for example, the area A where the effect display device 909 is provided, the area B where the effect accessory 90201 is provided, and the push button 90120. When the region is the region C, the distance between the regions BC may be shorter than the distance between the regions AB. With such a configuration, the directing accessory 90201 is provided in an area where the distance from the push button 90120 is shorter than the distance from the directing display device 909, which is considered to be the player's line of sight. The line of sight of the player can be effectively guided.

Further, the "neighborhood of the movable body" may be configured so that the distance between the above-mentioned areas BC is shorter than the size of the display screen of the effect display device 909, for example. For example, when the size of the display screen of the effect display device 909 (liquid crystal display device) is 15 inches (38.1 cm), the distance between the areas BC is configured to be less than 38.1 cm. May be good. With such a configuration, the effector 90201 and the push button 90120 are arranged in an area smaller than the size of the entire display screen of the effect display device 909, which the player usually pays attention to. The line of sight can be effectively guided.

Further, in another embodiment, as an aspect of the effect device in the vicinity of the movable body, a case where the effect accessory 90201 is provided relatively close to the push button 90120 via the out port 9026 is shown. , Not limited to such aspects. For example, even on the game area 907, the effector 90201 may be provided immediately above the push button 90120, and as described above, the effector may be placed on the game frame near the push button 90120. The object 90201 may be provided. Further, a movable body such as a push button 90120 and a directing accessory 90201 may be integrally configured. As described above, the "neighborhood of the movable body" means that the movable body such as the push button 90120 is provided at a distance that can guide the line of sight of the player to the specific effect using the effect object 90201. Good.

Further, in another embodiment, the case where the effect device used for the specific effect is the effect accessory 90201 provided with the accessory LED 90202 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, a lamp / LED provided in a specific area, a sub-liquid crystal display device, or the like may be used as the effect device to execute the specific effect in some form.

Further, in another embodiment, the case where the movable body is the push button 90120 is shown, but it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the movable body may be configured to include a movable member that can operate within a predetermined operating range, and the suggestive effect may be executed by operating the movable member provided in the vicinity of the effect device. ..

Further, according to another embodiment, the specific effect can be executed after the movable body is operated (in this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), FIG. 63 ( Execute the specific effect shown in 5)). Therefore, it is possible to draw attention to the specific effect before the start of the specific effect.

In the other embodiment, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is stopped and a predetermined time (1 second in this example) elapses, the accessory LED 90202 of the effect accessory 90201 is lit and displayed for a specific effect. The case where the execution is started is shown, but it is not limited to such a mode. For example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 may be terminated after the accessory LED 90202 of the effect accessory 90201 is lit and displayed during the vibration operation of the push button 90120. Even with such a configuration, since the vibration operation of the push button 90120 has already started before the start of the specific effect, it is possible to draw attention to the specific effect before the start of the specific effect. Further, for example, at the same time as the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is stopped, the accessory LED 90202 of the effect accessory 90201 may be turned on and displayed to start the execution of the specific effect, and various aspects can be considered.

Further, in the other embodiment, after starting the darkening display (blackout display) in the effect display device 909, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 is started after a predetermined time (1 second in this example) has elapsed. Cases are shown, but not limited to such aspects. For example, the push button 90120 may be configured to start the vibration operation at the same time as the blackout display (blackout display) or the frame LED is turned off, and various modes can be considered.

Further, according to another embodiment, the movable body is an operating means (in this example, the push button 90120) that can be operated by the player, and the operating means is vibrated when the specific effect is executed. (In this example, after the vibration operation of the push button 90120 shown in FIG. 63 (3), the specific effect shown in FIG. 63 (5) is executed). Further, the operating means includes a decorative member (in this example, the vibrated member 90303 shown in FIGS. 28 and 29) in which the vibration operation can be visually recognized. Therefore, the line of sight of the player can be guided to a specific effect by sight and touch.

In the other embodiment, the case where the decorative member (in this example, the vibrated member 90303) is included in the push button 90120 is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it does not necessarily have to be built in the push button 90120, and some decorative member may be provided in the vicinity of the push button 90120. Then, for example, the vibration operation of the push button 90120 may be transmitted, and the decorative member provided in the vicinity thereof may also be configured to vibrate. Anything that can emphasize the vibration operation of the push button 90120 in some form is sufficient.

Further, according to another embodiment, the display means is darkened when the specific effect is executed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), the entire display screen of the effect display device 909 is displayed. Dim display (blackout display)). Further, the movable body can be operated while the light emitting body for effect (frame LED 9028 in this example) is turned off (in this example, as shown in FIG. 63 (3), the effect display device 909 is darkened. The push button 90120 is vibrated while being displayed (blackout display) and all the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off). Therefore, it is possible to more effectively guide the player's line of sight to a specific effect. Specifically, in the other embodiment, the effect display device 909 is darkened (blacked out) and nothing is displayed, and all the frame LEDs 9028 of the game frame are turned off. Therefore, the push button 90120 is used. The vibration motion can be made more conspicuous, and the player's line of sight can be effectively guided to a specific effect.

In the other embodiment, the case where all the frame LEDs 9028 are turned off is shown as the light emitting body for the effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, it is not always necessary to turn off all the lamps / LEDs provided in the game machine, and a plurality of lamps / LEDs may be configured to be turned off, and one lamp / LED (for example, a light emitting area) may be turned off. It may be configured to turn off only the lamp / LED) which is large and particularly conspicuous. Further, in another embodiment, even when the frame LED 9028 is off, when the suggestion effect is executed, the button LED 90360 of the push button 90120 is turned on to emphasize the push button 90120. As shown, the button LED 90360 may be configured to be turned off while the frame LED 9028 is turned off.

Further, according to the other embodiment, the movable body is formed by a plurality of types of operation modes including at least a first operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 1 second) and a second operation mode (for example, a vibration time of 3 seconds). It can be operated (see FIG. 59). Then, the execution mode of the specific effect differs depending on whether the movable body is operated according to the first operation mode or the movable body is operated according to the second operation mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 59, the vibration time 1 When the vibration operation of the push button 90120 for 2 seconds is performed, the specific effect A is executed, and when the vibration operation of the push button 90120 for 3 seconds is performed, the specific effect B is executed). Therefore, it is possible to pay attention to the operation mode of the movable body.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the case where the type of the specific effect to be executed differs depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 90120) is shown, but only in such a mode. I can't. For example, it may be configured so that the presence or absence of execution of the specific effect differs depending on the operation mode of the movable body (in this example, the vibration time of the push button 90120). As such, it suffices that the execution mode (presence / absence and type of execution) of the specific effect differs depending on the operation mode of the movable body in some form.

Other embodiments 2.
In the first other embodiment, the display area further comprises a display area in which a predetermined display can be displayed in a predetermined area that is difficult for the player to see, and a line-of-sight guidance effect that guides the player's line of sight to the predetermined area. It may be configured to be feasible at. Hereinafter, the second other embodiment in which the line-of-sight guidance effect can be executed will be described.

In addition, in this other embodiment, the detailed description of the portion having the same configuration and processing as that of the first other embodiment is omitted, and mainly the portion different from the first other embodiment is described. explain.

First, aspects of the effect display device 909 and the accessory 9050 in other embodiments will be described. The accessory 9050 is fixed to the game board 906 with screws (screws) or an adhesive (not shown). The accessory 9050 is a member having an L-shaped cross section having a portion 9050A protruding forward from the game board 906 and a portion 9050B hanging downward from the tip of the protruding portion (see FIG. 65 and the like). As shown in FIGS. 64 and 65, the accessory 9050 covers the upper region 905B, which is a portion other than the lower region 905A of the display area of the effect display device 909, from the front by the portion 9050B. Therefore, the upper region 905B is the portion 9050B when the player views the effect display device 909 from the front (when viewed in the normal posture of sitting on a chair and playing the game) (when viewed in the first posture). It is a difficult-to-see area that is hidden behind and cannot be seen, and cannot be seen unless the player looks into it from below (without taking a second posture). The display area of the effect display device 909 is composed of an upper area 905B and a lower area 905A (a region that can be visually recognized when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front).

Further, in the other embodiment, when the advance notice effect setting process is executed in the effect symbol change start process (step S98001) of the effect control process process and it is decided to execute the advance notice effect, the effect symbol change. In step S908003 of the start process, the process table corresponding to the advance notice effect is selected, and the process of step S908005 of the effect symbol change start process and the process during effect symbol change (step S90802) are executed according to the process table according to the advance notice effect. As a result, during the variable display of the effect symbol, the advance notice effect for notifying the expectation degree of super reach execution, the jackpot expectation degree, and the like is executed (see FIGS. 66 to 68). The notice effect is an effect of displaying a mini image, and the combination of the displayed mini images gives a notice of the degree of expectation that the super reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit. The advance notice production is executed before the reach is established. In other embodiments, mini-images A to C are prepared as mini-images displayed in the preview effect (see FIG. 66 and the like). In addition, each mini-image moves in a different path (see FIG. 66).

Areas Z901 to Z903 are set as areas for displaying a mini image in the display area of the effect display device 909 (see FIG. 67 and the like). One mini-image may be displayed in each area. If the displayed area is the area Z901, the mini image moves in the area Z901, if the displayed area is the area Z902, the mini image moves in the area Z902, and the displayed area is the area Z903. If so, it moves in the area Z903.

The region Z901 is arranged at the boundary between the lower region 905A and the upper region 905B (see FIG. 67 and the like). Therefore, when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front, the mini image displayed in the area Z901 (moving in the area Z901) is hidden behind the accessory 9050 (part 9050B) or from the back of the accessory 9050. It looks like it appears. The player sees such a mini-image, thinks that there may be something behind the character 9050 (upper area 905B), and tries to look into it (the mini-image raises the player's line of sight). Guided to region 905B).

The region Z902 is arranged in the lower left region (the region in the lower left when facing the lower region 905A) of the lower region 905A (see FIG. 67 and the like). The mini image displayed in the area Z902 (moving in the area Z902) is always visible when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front.

The area Z903 is arranged in the right area (the area on the right side of the upper area 905B) (see FIG. 67 and the like). Since the upper region 905B is a region hidden by the accessory 9050, the region Z903 cannot be visually recognized when the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front. The mini-image displayed in the area Z903 (moving in the area Z903) is visually recognized by guiding the line of sight by the mini-image displayed in the area Z901 (when the player looks from below).

When only one type of mini-image is displayed, the degree of expectation (possibility) that super reach will be executed is announced. Specifically, by displaying only one to three mini-images A, the degree of expectation that Super Reach A will be executed is foretold. Similarly, by displaying only one to three mini images B, the degree of expectation that Super Reach B will be executed is foretold, and by displaying only one to three mini images C, Super Reach is displayed. The degree of expectation that C will be executed is announced. The larger the number of mini-images, the higher the degree of expectation (the execution rate of the corresponding super reach) (confirmed by 3).

When multiple types of mini-images are displayed, the jackpot expectation is announced. Specifically, the mini image A and the mini image B are displayed, the mini image A and the mini image C are displayed, the mini image B and the mini image C are displayed, and the mini images A to C are displayed. All are displayed, and each combination gives a notice of the jackpot expectation. When the mini images A to C are displayed, the "big hit" is confirmed, and the expectation of a big hit is high in the order of mini image B + mini image C> mini image A + mini image C> mini image A + mini image C.

(Example of production screen)
Next, an example of the effect screen in the other embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. In addition, in FIG. 67 and the like, the downward arrows drawn in the decorative symbol display areas 905L, 905C, and 905R indicate that the decorative symbol is changing.

(Movement of mini image)
The mini images A to C displayed in the areas Z901 to Z903 behave as shown in FIG. For example, the mini image A reciprocates in an oblique direction (FIG. 66 (A)). The mini image B moves so as to draw a square locus (FIG. 66 (B)). The mini image C moves so as to draw a trajectory of a substantially triangular shape (FIG. 66 (C)). In this way, the mini images A to C behave differently. It should be noted that each of the mini-images A to C behaves in the same manner regardless of which of the areas Z901 to Z903 is set as the display position.

(Example of a production screen for a notice production that targets the expectation that Super Reach will be executed)
FIG. 67A is an effect screen when a notice effect for displaying the mini image A in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 is executed. FIG. 67B is an effect screen when a notice effect for displaying the mini image B in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 is executed. FIG. 67 (C) is an effect screen when a notice effect for displaying the mini image C in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 is executed. In the advance notice effects of FIGS. 67 (A) to 67 (C), three mini-images are displayed for each, so that the confirmation of the execution of the corresponding super reach is announced.

When the effect display device 909 is viewed from the front (hereinafter, also simply referred to as a front view), the lower portion of the region Z901 and the Z902 are visible, but the upper portion of the region Z901 and the region Z903 are within the upper region 905B. It is hidden behind the character 9050 and cannot be seen. Since the mini image displayed in the area Z901 moves between the invisible upper part and the visible lower part, it hides or appears behind the accessory 9050 (the portion 9050B extending downward). The player sees the movement of such a mini-image and tries to look into the upper area 905B (particularly the area Z903) hidden in the accessory 9050 in the display area of the effect display device 909 from below (the player's). The line of sight is guided by the movement of the mini image). For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

Further, since the area Z903 cannot be visually recognized when viewed from the front, a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 to Z903 and a notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 and Z902. Has the same appearance of the advance notice effect in the front view (mini images are displayed in the area Z901 and the area Z902). Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether two or three mini-images are displayed (that is, whether or not the third mini-image is displayed), and the player uses the area Z903 as a role. By looking from below the 9050 and checking, it is confirmed whether or not three mini-images are displayed (that is, whether or not the corresponding super reach execution is confirmed). For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

Similar to the above description, the notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in each of the areas Z901 and Z3 and the notice effect in which one mini image is displayed in the area Z901 have the same appearance when viewed from the front. Therefore, the player can check whether or not two mini-images are displayed by looking into the area Z903 from under the character 9050 (that is, whether or not the corresponding super reach is likely to be executed). ) Is confirmed. For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

(Example of a production screen for a notice production that targets the big hit expectation)
FIG. 68A is an effect screen when the advance notice effect of displaying the mini image A in the area Z901 and displaying the mini image B in the area Z902 is executed. FIG. 67B is an effect screen when the advance notice effect of displaying the mini image A in the area Z901, displaying the mini image B in the area Z902, and displaying the mini image C in the area Z903 is executed. In the preview effect of FIG. 68, since the mini images A to C are displayed, the big hit is confirmed.

As in FIG. 67, the mini-image displayed in the area Z901 moves between the invisible upper part and the visible lower part, so that it is hidden or appears behind the accessory 9050 (the portion 9050B extending downward). The player sees the movement of such a mini-image and tries to look into the upper area 905B (particularly the area Z903) hidden in the accessory 9050 in the display area of the effect display device 909 from below (the player's). The line of sight is guided by the movement of the mini image). For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

As in the case of FIG. 67, since the area Z903 cannot be visually recognized when viewed from the front, the notice effect shown in FIG. 68 (A) and the notice effect shown in FIG. 68 (B) have the same appearance in the front view. (A mini image A is displayed in the area Z901, and a mini image B is displayed in the area Z902). Therefore, the player looks into the area Z903 from below the accessory 9050 to check whether or not the last mini image C is displayed (that is, the variable display during execution is confirmed as a "big hit". Check if there is any). For this reason, the interest of the game is improving.

(Effects of other embodiments, etc.)
As described above, according to another embodiment, the mini image can be displayed in the upper region 905B (here, region Z903) which is hidden by the accessory 9050 and cannot be visually recognized when viewed from the front (FIG. 67, etc.). Then, the player looks into the upper region 905B by the movement of the mini image displayed in the region Z901 (hidden behind the accessory 9050 or appears from the back of the accessory 9050, such as FIG. 67). As described above, in the other embodiment, the movement of the mini image (hidden in the accessory 9050 or appearing from the accessory 9050) causes the player's line of sight to be in the upper region 905B (here, region Z903). It can be guided and the interest of the game is improving. It should be noted that such an effect of guiding the player's line of sight (here, an effect of moving the mini image) is also referred to as a line of sight guidance effect.

Further, in the other embodiment, there are a plurality of types of mini images (particularly, mini images displayed in the area Z901 and the area Z903), and further, there are a plurality of types of movements of the mini image (here, mini). The movement differs depending on the type of image) (Fig. 66, etc.). As a result, the production is diversified and the interest of the game is improved. Further, in the other embodiment, the mini image displayed in the area Z901 constitutes a notice effect, and the degree of expectation for super reach to be executed and the degree of expectation for big hit are foretold depending on the type of the mini image and the like. The person pays attention to the type of the mini-image (that is, the player also pays attention to the mode of the line-of-sight guidance effect), and the interest of the game is improved.

In addition, the player announces the degree of expectation that the super reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of a big hit by the advance notice effect, that is, by the combination of the mini images displayed in the areas Z901 to Z903 (inside and outside the upper area 905B). A mini image is searched for over the entire display screen of the display device 909. As a result, the interest of the game is improved.

Further, by hiding the upper part of the area Z901 and the upper area 905B including the area Z903 with the accessory 9050, the player is made to look from below, so that the range of the production is widened and the interest of the game is improved.

Further, in another embodiment, the appearance of the notice effect when viewed from the front (whether or not a mini image is displayed in the areas Z901 and Z902, etc., is also the execution mode of the notice effect in the lower area 905A. It can be said.) It is not possible to know the content of the notice (here, the degree of expectation that the super reach will be executed and the degree of expectation of the big hit) that the notice effect during execution gives notice, and the player can move to the area Z903. You can only understand it after checking it. Therefore, the effect of the advance notice effect is enhanced, and the interest of the game is improved.

It is also possible to configure the game machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the first other embodiment and the second other embodiment shown above. For example, when the configuration shown in the first other embodiment is applied to the configuration shown in the second other embodiment, a part of the liquid crystal display device (effect display device 909) is placed on the game area 907. A mini image such as a character image is displayed on the back side of the accessory 9050 provided so as to cover it, and a part of the mini image is displayed so as to protrude from the back of the accessory 9050 (for example, the character image in the area Z901). It may be configured to move and display so that is visible and disappears), and the accessory 9050 may be configured to vibrate rattlingly. In this case, (1) the accessory 9050 vibrates in a rattling manner to attract attention to the accessory 9050, (2) then the character image displayed protruding in the area 1 is focused, and (3) then the combination. The character image displayed in the area Z903 hidden behind the object 9050 may be focused on, and the player's line of sight may be guided step by step.

In the other embodiments described above, the variation time, the type of reach effect, the presence or absence of pseudo-ream (an effect in which one or more temporary stops and re-variations of symbols are executed during one variable display), etc. In order to notify the effect control microcomputer 90100 of the fluctuation pattern indicating the fluctuation mode of the above, an example of transmitting one fluctuation pattern command at the start of the fluctuation is shown, but the fluctuation pattern is transmitted by two or more commands. The effect control microcomputer 90100 may be notified. Specifically, when notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 90560 uses the first command as the first command, such as the presence / absence of a pseudo-ream, the presence / absence of a slip effect, etc., before reaching (if not reaching, so-called A command indicating the fluctuation time and fluctuation mode before the second stop is sent, and as the second command, the type of reach, the presence or absence of a re-lottery effect, etc. are sent after the reach is reached (so-called if the reach is not reached). A command indicating the fluctuation time and the fluctuation mode (after the second stop) may be transmitted. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 90100 may perform the effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. The game control microcomputer 90560 may notify the fluctuation time by each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 90100 may select a specific fluctuation mode to be executed at each timing. .. When sending two commands, the two commands may be sent within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed after sending the first command (for example, the following A second command may be sent (in the timer interrupt). The variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the order of transmission can be changed as appropriate. By notifying the fluctuation pattern with two or more commands in this way, it is possible to reduce the amount of data that must be stored as the fluctuation pattern command.

Further, in the other embodiments described above, "different proportions" are limited to those having different proportions due to a relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. However, it is a concept that includes those having different ratios due to the relationship such as A: B = 100%: 0% (that is, one having 100% allocation and the other having 0% allocation).

Further, in the other embodiment described above, for example, a case where a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, and ordinary symbols of "1" to "9" are variably displayed and the display result is derived and displayed is shown, but the variable display is , Not limited to such aspects. For example, the variably displayed symbol and the derived symbol do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derived and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and the variable display may be executed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately turning on and blinking the one type of symbol display. Even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one type of symbol is derived and displayed at the end. It may be a thing.

Further, in the other embodiment described above, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of the gaming machine, but in the present invention, a plurality of medals are inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of operating levers are operated by the player. When the type of symbol is rotated and the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, when the combination of the stop symbols becomes a specific combination of symbols, a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player in the slot machine. It is also possible to apply.

Further, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as a prize, and a game medium such as a game ball is enclosed and a score is given when the conditions for giving the prize are satisfied. It can also be applied to a type of gaming machine.

Further, in the other embodiment described above, the jackpot type includes a probabilistic jackpot and a normal jackpot, and based on the determination that the jackpot type is a probabilistic jackpot, a gaming machine controlled to a probabilistic state after the jackpot game is completed is shown. However, it is not limited to such a game machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation region inside (a probability variation region may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable winning balls provided. A probability variation area may be provided in a part of the device), and the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the jackpot game. It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in the other embodiment described above to the gaming machine controlled to the probabilistic state after the end.

The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 ... Pachinko game machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R… Speaker 9… Game effect lamp 11… Main board 12… Production control board 13… Voice control board 14… Lamp control board 15… Relay board 20… Ordinary symbol display 21… Gate switch 22A, 22B… Start port switch 23… Count switch 31A ... Stick controller 31B ... Push button 100 ... Game control microcomputer 101, 121 ... ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... Random number circuit 120 ... CPU for effect control
123… Display control unit 125… I / O
901 ... Pachinko game machine 908a ... 1st special symbol display 908b ... 2nd special symbol display 909 ... Production display device 9013 ... 1st start winning opening 9014 ... 2nd starting winning opening 909a ... 1st reserved storage display unit 909b ... Second hold storage display unit 9020 ... Special variable winning ball device 9031 ... Game control board (main board)
9056 ... CPU
90560 ... Game control microcomputer 9080 ... Production control board 90100 ... Production control microcomputer 90101 ... Production control CPU
90109 ... VDP
90120 ... Push button 90122 ... Stick controller 90126 ... Vibrator motor 90201 ... Directing accessory 90202 ... Accessory LED
90303 ... Vibrated member 90360 ... Button LED

Claims (1)

It is a gaming machine equipped with a display means and can be controlled in an advantageous state.
A production device that can perform production and
Movable movable body and
A specific effect executing means capable of executing a specific effect in the vicinity of the movable body using the effect device,
A movable body control means for operating the movable body and
It is possible to execute the suggestion effect suggesting whether or not the advantageous state is controlled by the mode of the effect executed by the predetermined effect means, and to execute the effect auxiliary display related to the suggestion effect by the display means. A certain suggestion production execution means,
A notice effect execution means that can execute multiple types of notice effects,
With
The movable body control means can operate the movable body when the specific effect is executed.
The suggestion effect execution means
It is possible to further execute a suggestion display effect different from the suggestion effect.
When the specific condition that the suggestion effect and the suggestion display effect are executed within the same period is satisfied, the effect auxiliary display is displayed in the specific display area of the display means, and at least the suggestion display is displayed. The effect is ended after the end of the suggestion effect, and the display by the specific display area is ended based on the end of the suggestion display effect.
When the specific condition is not satisfied, the effect auxiliary display can be displayed in a predetermined display area different from the specific display area.
The advance notice effect executing means can execute the plurality of types of advance notice effects in the specific display area.
A game machine characterized by that.